English
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 1 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PREPARATIONS 12
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting Zone2 speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7 Connecting audio recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 32
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
PLAYBACK 36
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Preparing the DAB tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Displaying the DAB information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 2 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
En 3
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
CONFIGURATIONS 78
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . 93
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
APPENDIX 99
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-S600.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
DAB radio (RX-S600D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 3 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
En 4
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 4 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
Accessories En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna (RX-S600) FM antenna (RX-S600)
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
DAB/FM antenna (RX-S600D) YPAO microphone
CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-S600 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within 6 m (20 ft)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 5 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
Audio/Video
(via HDMI or MHL)
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.111
Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)
. p.37
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad
. p.56
•USB
. p.60
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.63
• Internet radio
. p.66
•AirPlay
. p.68
iPod/iPhone/iPad
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system.
Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces
in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.32
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert
halls (CINEMA DSP)
. p.39
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.43
• Playing back music in multiple rooms
(multi-zone)
. p.70
3D and 4K Ultra HD signals
supported
Smartphone/Tablet
Control
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 6 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.24)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.19)
When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input
from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
❑ Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android device
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the
Yamaha website for details.
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.39)
The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you
to create a 3-dimensional sound field in your own room
(CINEMA DSP 3D).
❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.42)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry,
which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.44)(RX-S600)
❑ Listening to DAB radio (p.48) and FM radio
(p.52) (RX-S600D)
❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
You can operate the iPod or USB storage device, view
information, or easily configure the settings using the
on-screen menu.
❑ Low power consumption
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption and helps to create an
eco-friendly home theater system (p.88).
BD/DVD
player
Game
console
Camcorder
TV
Set-top box
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Useful tips
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (p.26).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.86).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.84).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to use the supplied remote control to operate
external devices…
Register the remote control codes of the external
devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.95).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.31).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “Network Update” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu or
“UPDATE” (p.94) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware.
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• SCENE settings (p.37)
• Sound/video settings and signal information for each
source (p.74)
• Various function settings (p.79)
• System settings (p.93)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 7 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8
Front panel
1 ZONE key
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.71).
2 INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.73).
3 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
4 Front display
Displays information (p.9).
5 DIRECT key
Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.42).
6 INPUT knob
Select an input source.
7 z (power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
8 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.84)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.84)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.91)
• An iPod is being charged (p.56)
9 PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
0 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.32).
A STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.41).
B PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.38).
C SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.37).
D VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game
consoles (p.27).
E USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.60) or an iPod
(p.56).
F VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INFO
DIRECT
V
O
L
U
M
E
ZONE
INPUT
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
BD/DVD
TV NET RADIO
VIDEO AUX
SCENE
AUDI O VID EO
PROGRA
M
5V
2.1A
2 31
7 8
4 5
6
F9:
A EDBC
(RX-S600 U.S.A. model)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 8 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.39) is working.
CINEMA DSP n
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.41) is working.
3 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.43) is
working.
4 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.75) is working.
5 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
(RX-S600) or FM radio station (RX-S600D) signal.
6 PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.72)
7 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
8 ZONE2
Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.70).
9 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
0 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
A Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
B Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.73).
C Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
L Subwoofer
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
SW
C
LR
SL SR
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
ADAPTIVE DRC
STEREO
3
TUNED
SLEEP
OUT
PARTY
2
ZONE
1234679:5 8
A AB C
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 9 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10
Rear panel
1 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.19). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
2 HDMI 1–4 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.24).
3 HDMI 5/MHL jack
For connecting to an HDMI- or MHL-compatible playback
device and inputting video/audio signals (p.24).
4 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting the radio antennas (p.28).
5 DC OUT jack
For supplying power to a Yamaha AV accessory. For details
on connections, refer to the instruction manual of the AV
accessory.
6 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.29).
7 Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.30).
8 AV 1–5 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.24).
9 AUDIO 1–2 jacks
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting
audio signals (p.27).
0 AUDIO OUT jacks
For outputting audio to a recording device (such as a tape
deck) (p.30).
A SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.16).
B MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks:
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.23).
VIDEO jack:
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.23).
C SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.16).
D VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.30).
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
NETWORK
DC OUT
AV
5
AUDI O
2
AUDI O
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
MHL
5V
1A
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
YPB
PR
ANTENNA
AM
FM
75
(
RADIO
)
C: A B
1
3 6 752
8
D
4
9
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(RX-S600 U.S.A. model)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 10 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
SOURCE key
Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.96).
This key lights up in green after pressed.
RECEIVER key
Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.96). This key
lights up in orange after pressed.
RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–4 HDMI 1–4 jacks
HDMI 5 HDMI 5/MHL jack
AV 1–5 AV 1–5 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 AUDIO 1–2 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel)
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
FM FM radio
AM AM radio (RX-S600)
DAB DAB radio (RX-S600D)
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.71).
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.37).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.38).
7 External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.96).
8 SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.78).
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switchesd between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio
reception (p.44, p.52).
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.58).
A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source (p.44, p.48, p.52).
MEMORY Registers radio stations as presets.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is
selected (p.96).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.38).
C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.73).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
F TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.95).
G PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.72).
H VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
I MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
J OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.74).
K CODE SET key
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.95).
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.95).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
G
I
J
K
1
3
2
5
4
6
H
7
E
D
F
8
A
B
:
C
9
(RX-S600)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 11 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 12
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.13)
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2 Connecting speakers (p.16)
Connect the speakers to the unit.
3 Connecting a TV (p.19)
Connect a TV to the unit.
4 Connecting playback devices (p.24)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5 Connecting the radio antennas (p.28)
Connect the supplied FM/AM/DAB antennas to the unit.
6 Connecting to a network (p.29)
Connect the unit to a network.
7 Connecting audio recording devices (p.30)
Connect audio recording devices to the unit.
8 Connecting the power cable (p.30)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.31)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
10
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.32)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 12 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 13
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout
examples.
• You can use the Zone2 function or bi-amp connections simultaneously with the 2.1- or 3.1-channel system.
1 Placing speakers
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 6-ohm speakers. When connecting speakers with impedance of 8 ohm or more, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “8 MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker
impedance” (p.15).
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the number of channels)
5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
●●●●
Front (R) 2 ●●●●
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●
Surround (L) 4
Produce surround right/left channel sounds.
●●
Surround (R) 5 ●●
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”.
●●●●
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 13 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 14
5.1-channel system
4.1-channel system
3.1-channel system
2.1-channel system
45
12
39
10° to 30°10° to 30°
45
12
9
10° to 30°10° to 30°
12
39
12
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 14 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 15
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 6-ohm speakers. When connecting
speakers with impedance of 8 ohm or more, set the speaker impedance to “8 MIN”.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).
3
Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “8 MIN”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
z (power) STRAIGHT
SPIMP.6MIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 15 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for
5.1-channel system as examples. For other systems,
connect speakers while referring to the connection
diagram for the 5.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)
5.1-channel system
■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
2 Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
–
+
–
+
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
DC OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
5V
0.5A
YPB PR
A
AM
FM
75
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
FRONT
-
+
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
+
a
b
Banana plug
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 16 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17
■ Connecting the subwoofer
(with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND/ZONE 2/BI-AMP jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.81) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting
the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• The FRONT jacks and SURROUND/ZONE 2/BI-AMP jacks output
the same signals.
Connecting Zone2 speakers
The Zone2 function allows you to playback an input
source in the room where the unit is installed (main
zone) and in another room (Zone2). To connect the
Zone2 speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple
rooms” (p.70).
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO 2
Audio pin cable
12
3
9
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
The unit (rear)
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• Surround speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 17 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 18
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
(through output) features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
❑ HDMI/MHL jack
Transmit digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL
cable.
• The HDMI 5/MHL jack of the unit supports both HDMI and MHL
connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on your
MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an
HDMI-compatible playback device to the jack, use an HDMI cable.
For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL connection” (p.24).
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
(Stereo L/R jacks)
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
(Stereo mini jack)
Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo
mini-plug cable.
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI cable
HDMI 5
5V
MHL
1A
MHL cable
Component video cable
Video pin cable
AV 1
OPTICAL
Digital optical cable
AV 1
Digital coaxial cable
AUDIO 2
Stereo pin cable
AUDIO
Stereo mini-plug cable
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 18 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 19
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.84) in the “Setup” menu.
• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
3 Connecting a TV
When connecting a video device with an analog video output
• If you will connect any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, you also
need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks (p.23).
• If you will connect any video device to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the
unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.23).
When using a set-top box to watch TV
• Connect the set-top box to the unit in the same way as playback devices (p.24). If you will receive TV
broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the
TV and the unit or configure the ARC setting.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
■ Connection Method 3 (p.22)
■ Connection Method 2 (p.21)
■ Connection Method 1 (p.19)
■ Connection Method 4 (p.23)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.111).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
AV
5
AUDI
O
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
H
HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI
ARC
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
The unit (rear)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 19 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 20
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press SETUP.
d Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
e Press ENTER again.
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.
g Press SETUP.
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.21).
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.37), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
D
I
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
O
N
T
O
P MEN
U
PO
P-UP
/
MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
SETUP
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Configuration
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
ARC
SCENE
On
Auto
Auto
AUDIO 1
Auto
On
Back: RETURN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 20 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 21
■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.84) in the “Setup” menu.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press SETUP.
c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
d Press ENTER again.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.
f Press SETUP.
AV
5
AUDI
O
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
H
HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OO
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
D
I
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
O
N
T
O
P MEN
U
PO
P-UP
/
MENU
Cursor keys
ENTER
SETUP
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Configuration
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
ARC
SCENE
On
Auto
Auto
AUDIO 1
Auto
On
Back: RETURN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 21 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 22
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio
Input” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function
(p.37), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
If you switch the input source of the unit to “AUDIO 1” using the AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV)
keys, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jack or if you want to use another input jack
(other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–5 and AUDIO 2 jacks. To
use the SCENE function (p.37), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
AV
5
AUDI
O
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
H
HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
OO
The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 22 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 23
■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the
unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO) jack of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV), the TV
audio will be played back on the unit.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jack or if you want to use another input jack
(other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–5 and AUDIO 2 jacks. To
use the SCENE function (p.37), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
N
E
DC OUT
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
VIDEO
PB PR
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
MHL
5V
1A
5V
0.5A
YPB PR
ANTENNA
AM
FM
75
(
RADIO
)
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OO
P
R
P
B
Y
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
YP
B
P
R
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video input
(component video)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
N
E
DC OUT
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
VIDEO
PB PR
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
MHL
5V
1A
5V
0.5A
YPB PR
ANTENNA
AM
FM
75
(
RADIO
)
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
Video input
(composite video)
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 23 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 24
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting an iPod (p.56)
– Connecting a USB storage device (p.60)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.26).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.19 to 22).
❑ MHL connection
Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an
MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the
mobile device. The HDMI 5/MHL jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio
directly from the mobile device to the unit.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 5, the video/audio played back on the
mobile device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the HDMI 5/MHL jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.19 to 22).
• You need to prepare an MHL cable that match the jack on your mobile device.
• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and
numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the
mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.
• If “Standby Through” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio
to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby
mode.
• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.
– The unit is turned on.
– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
4 Connecting playback devices
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
MHL
5V
1A
YPB
ANTENNA
AM
FM
75
(
RADIO
)
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
MHL
5V
1A
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–5 jacks
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
MHL
5V
1A
YPB
ANTENNA
AM
FM
75
(
RADIO
)
MHL
MHL
HDMI 5
MHL
5V
1A
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
HDMI 5/MHL jack
MHL output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 24 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 25
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.23).
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–5, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.23).
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV
5
AUDI
O
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
H
HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AV
2
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YP
B
P
R
O
O
C
C
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
The unit (rear)
AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output (digital optical or digital coaxial)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 4–5 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AV
5
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
R
L
COAXIAL
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
V
V
COAXIAL
VIDEO
The unit (rear)
AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(either digital coaxial or
analog stereo)
Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,
AV 4–5 (AUDIO) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 25 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 26
■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑ Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2
Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.
3
Press OPTION.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (
e
/
r
) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be
used).
6
Press OPTION.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–5
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–5
AV 4–5 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 2
Component video Analog stereo
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)
AV 4–5 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 2
Composite video Digital optical AV 3
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
AV
5
AUDI
O
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
H
HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
R
L
AUDIO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
L
R
L
R
AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
DISPLA
Y
RETURN
SETU
P
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
FM
NET
AV
AUDIO
5
4
12
52
31
V-AUX
USB
AM
F
NE
T
AV
A
UDIO
5
4
1
2
5
1
3
V-AUX
US
B
AM
OPTION
ENTER
AV 2
Cursor keys
VOL.
AudioIn
VOL.
AudioAV5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 26 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 27
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–5 or AUDIO 1–2, the audio played back
on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as
camcorders and portable audio players to the unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.23).
• You need to prepare the video/audio cables that match the output jacks on your device.
• For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.56) or
“Connecting a USB storage device” (p.60).
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output
from the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital optical
AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 4–5 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 2
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
A
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 1–5 jacks
AUDIO 1–2 jacks
The unit (rear)
Audio device
INFO
DIRECT
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
YPAO MIC
STRAIGHT
BD/DVD
TV NET RADIO
VIDEO AUX
SCENE
AUDI O VID EO
PROGRA
M
5V
2.1A
V
Portable audio player
Camcorder
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 27 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the radio antennas En 28
■ FM/AM antennas (RX-S600)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
■ DAB/FM antenna (RX-S600D)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
5 Connecting the radio antennas
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA S
P
FRONT
NETWORK
DC OUT
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
SURROUND / ZO
/BI-AMP
MHL
5V
1A
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
YPB PR
ANTENNA
AM
FM
75
(
RADIO
)
FM antennaAM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA S
P
FRONT
NETWORK
DC OUT
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
SURROUND / ZO
/BI-AMP
MHL
5V
1A
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
YPB PR
75
ANTENNA
(RADIO
)
DAB/FM
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 28 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 29
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.90).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
6 Connecting to a network
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTR
A
FRONT
NETWORK
DC OUT
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
SURROUN
D
/BI-
A
MHL
5V
1A
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
YPB PR
ANTENNA
AM
FM
75
(
RADIO
)
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 29 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting audio recording devices En 30
You can connect audio recording devices to the AUDIO OUT jacks. These jacks output
analog audio signals selected as the input.
• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 4–5 jacks, AUDIO 2 jacks, or
VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
• Be sure to use the AUDIO OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
7 Connecting audio recording devices
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
ANTENNA
A
(
RADIO
)
R
L
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
OUT
The unit (rear) AUDIO OUT jacks Audio input
Audio recording
device
8 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
T
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
VOLTAGE
SELECTEOR
120V
110V
240V
220V
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
T
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 30 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 31
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3
Press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
English
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Italiano
中文
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
English
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Italiano
中文
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
ET
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
SETUP
ENTER
RECEIVER z
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 31 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 32
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
The following screen appears on the TV.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
12
3
9
45
YPAO microphone
Listening
position
Ear height
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
The unit (front)
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Press SETUP key
to Start
Power Amp Assign
Basic
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
ET
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
RECEIVER z
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 32 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 33
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or use the
cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before starting the
measurement.
• To change the internal amplifier assignment, use "Power Amp Assign" (p.81)
in the "Setup" menu.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
5
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Start” and press SETUP.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to
start the measurement immediately.
• To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the
procedure in “Error messages” (p.34).
• If cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to the external
device operation mode. In this case, press RECEIVER to set the remote
control to the unit operation mode and then use the cursor keys.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
1 The number of speakers (front side/rear
side/subwoofer)
2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)
3 Adjustment range of speaker output level
4 Warning message (if available)
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.34) or “Warning messages” (p.35).
• A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in
the front display.
• If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use
the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages.
6
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
1
2
3
4
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
OK:ENTER
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
SAVE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
SETUP
ENTER
RETURN
RECEIVER
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 33 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 34
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
TV screen
Front display
■ Procedure to handle errors
1
Check the content of error message and
press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To exit the YPAO measurement:
a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press
ENTER.
c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
To retry the YPAO measurement from
beginning:
Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.
To proceed with the current YPAO
measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only):
Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.
Error
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
ERROR
E-5:Noisy
PROCEED
5%
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
E-5:NOISY
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP)
Front speakers are not detected.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker
connections.
E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)
One of the surround speakers cannot be
detected.
E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY)
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and
ignores any noise detected.
E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC)
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO.
E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test
tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL)
The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.
E-10:Internal Err.
(E-10:INTERNAL)
An internal error has occurred.
Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs
repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 34 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 35
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
TV screen
Front display
■ Procedure to handle warnings
1
Check the content of warning message
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To save the measurement results:
Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
To discard the measurement result:
Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
3
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the
unit.
Warning
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
W-1:Out of Phase
OK:ENTER
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
W-1:PHASE
Problem speaker (blinks)
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)
A speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. If
the speaker is connected incorrectly, exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this
message may appear even if the speakers are connected
correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft)
from the listening position.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker
within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)
There are significant volume differences
between the speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of
each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is
any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect
speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We
recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 35 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 36
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) (p.44)
• Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) (p.48)
• Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) (p.52)
• Playing back iPod music (p.56)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.60)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.63)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.66)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.68)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu (p.75).
Basic playback procedure
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
VOLUME
MUTE
Input selection keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 36 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 37
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off with just
one touch.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or
start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction
with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.85) in the
“Setup” menu to “On”.
Configuring scene assignments
1
Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.36)
• Select a sound program (p.38)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.43)
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
3
If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.96) to register it.
• You can also configure scene assignments for Zone2 playback (p.72).
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE Input Sound program
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
SCENE link
playback
BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE (Sci-Fi) Off On
TV AUDIO 1 STRAIGHT On On
NET NET RADIO MUSIC (5ch Stereo) On Off
RADIO TUNER MUSIC (5ch Stereo) On Off
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
SETComplete
VOL.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
DE
R
E
C
EIVE
R
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
SCENE
SOURCE
Input selection keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 37 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 38
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.39).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.40).
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.42).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.41).
❑ Switching to the direct playback mode
• Press DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.42).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.43).
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM on the front panel.
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or
playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.41) is automatically
selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.9).
Selecting the sound mode
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
ET
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
INF
O
S
LEE
P
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
DIRECT
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 38 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 39
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room.
• When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.
• You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.75) in the “Option” menu.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
VOL.
Sound program category
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 39 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 40
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
5ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 40 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 41
■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
CINEMA DSP 3D creates a natural stereoscopic sound field in your
room.
CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions
are met.
• One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) is
selected (p.39).
• “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit
automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side
speakers.
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
3
Hall in Vienna
VOL.
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STRAIGHT
VOL.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
STRAIGHT
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 41 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 42
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.108).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
• You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.85)
in the “Setup” menu.
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(direct playback)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not
available.
– Selecting sound programs
– Adjusting the tone control
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
– Zone2 function
bPro Logic
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLII Movie
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
movies.
bPLII Music
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
music.
bPLII Game
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for
games.
Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
ProLogic
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
DIRECT
VOL.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
ET
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
DIRECT
SUR.DECODE
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 42 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 43
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz
– High-definition streaming audio
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.75) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
SW
C
L
SL SR
ENHANCER
R
Enhancer On
VOL.
“ENHANCER” lights up
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
ENHANCER
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 43 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) En 44
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press z (power).
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode
and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press FM or AM to select a band.
2
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM
radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.77) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600)
z (power)
PROGRAMSTRAIGHT
TUFM50/AM9
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
SBL SBR
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM98.50MHz
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
TUNING
MODE
FM
AM
Numeric keys
(RX-S600)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 44 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) En 45
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to
40 stations).
• To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the
Auto Preset function.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again
to start the registration immediately.
• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press
PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds
after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just
wait for 5 seconds).
• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.44)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
VOL.
AutoPreset
VOL.
01:FM87.50MHz
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
VOL.
AutoPreset
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset number
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
02:Empty
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
DI
S
PLA
Y
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
PRESET
MEMORY
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
FM
AM
Cursor keys
(RX-S600)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 45 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) En 46
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
■ Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
01:FM98.50MHz
PRESET
VOL.
ClearPreset
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset station to be cleared
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:Cleared
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
PRESET
OPTION
ENTER
FM
AM
Cursor keys
Numeric keys
(RX-S600)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 46 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) En 47
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.45).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
ProgramType
INFO
Item name
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
CLASSICS
9850
Information
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
TPFM101.30MHz
FINISH
Traffic information station (frequency)
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
INFO
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
(RX-S600)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 47 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) En 48
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
DAB
ZONE 2
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
ZONE
2
TUNING
ENTER
DAB
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer
sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The
unit can also receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that
allows for more stations using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which
has a more efficient transmission method.
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently
being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB
frequencies, check WorldDMB online at
http://www.worlddab.org/.
• For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the DAB/FM antenna”
(p.28).
Preparing the DAB tuning
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below
to perform an initial scan.
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you
have not performed an initial scan yet.
2
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes
into the first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.51).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.49) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the
initial scan.
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
2
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio
station.
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.77) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D)
VOL.
Press[ENTER]
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
>>>-------30%
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
BBCRadio4
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
DailyService
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
BBCNational
Secondary station
(RX-S600D)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 48 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) En 49
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
DAB
ZONE 2
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
ZONE
2
PRESET
MEMORY
DAB
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you
have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting
their preset numbers.
• You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
(p.48) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset
number, and then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset
number.
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB
radio station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:BBCRadio4
Preset number
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
02:Empty
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
PRESET:01
(RX-S600D)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 49 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) En 50
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
DAB
ZONE 2
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
ZONE
2
INFO
OPTION
ENTER
DAB
■ Clearing preset DAB radio stations
Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is
tuned into a DAB radio station.
1
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB
radio station.
VOL.
ClearPreset
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
01:Clear?
Preset station to be cleared
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:Cleared
Service Label Station name
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label Ensemble name
Program Type Station genre
Date And Time Current date and time
Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
ProgramType
Item name
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
ClassicMusic
Information
Cursor keys
(RX-S600D)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 50 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) En 51
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
DAB
ZONE 2
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
ZONE
2
OPTION
ENTER
DAB
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label
(0 [none] to 100 [best]).
1
Press DAB to select the DAB band.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune Aid” and press
ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB
channel label.
5
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
5ALevel:80
DAB channel label Reception strength
Frequency
Channel
label
Frequency
Channel
label
174.928 MHz 5A 208.064 MHz 9D
176.640 MHz 5B 209.936 MHz 10A
178.352 MHz 5C 211.648 MHz 10B
180.064 MHz 5D 213.360 MHz 10C
181.936 MHz 6A 215.072 MHz 10D
183.648 MHz 6B 216.928 MHz 11A
185.360 MHz 6C 218.640 MHz 11B
187.072 MHz 6D 220.352 MHz 11C
188.928 MHz 7A 222.064 MHz 11D
190.640 MHz 7B 223.936 MHz 12A
192.352 MHz 7C 225.648 MHz 12B
194.064 MHz 7D 227.360 MHz 12C
195.936 MHz 8A 229.072 MHz 12D
197.648 MHz 8B 230.784 MHz 13A
199.360 MHz 8C 232.496 MHz 13B
201.072 MHz 8D 234.208 MHz 13C
202.928 MHz 9A 235.776 MHz 13D
204.640 MHz 9B 237.488 MHz 13E
206.352 MHz 9C 239.200 MHz 13F
Cursor keys
(RX-S600D)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 51 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) En 52
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
DAB
ZONE 2
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
NE
T
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
DAB
ZONE
2
TUNING
MODE
FM
You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press FM to select the FM band.
2
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from an FM
radio station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM
radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.77) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D)
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
SBL SBR
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
FM98.50MHz
Numeric keys
(RX-S600D)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 52 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) En 53
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
DAB
ZONE 2
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
DI
S
PLA
Y
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
DAB
ZONE
2
PRESET
MEMORY
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
FM
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you
have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting
their preset numbers.
• You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
■ Registering FM radio stations
automatically (Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to
40 stations).
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the
Auto Preset function.
1
Press FM to select the FM band.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.
4
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again
to start the registration immediately.
• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press
PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds
after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just
wait for 5 seconds).
• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Registering an FM radio station manually
Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset
number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.44)
to tune into the desired FM radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the
selected radio station will be registered to the preset
number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will
be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number
after the most recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
VOL.
AutoPreset
VOL.
01:FM87.50MHz
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
VOL.
AutoPreset
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset number
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
02:Empty
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Cursor keys
(RX-S600D)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 53 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) En 54
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
DAB
ZONE 2
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
DAB
ZONE
2
PRESET
OPTION
ENTER
FM
■ Selecting a preset FM radio station
Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset
number.
1
Press FM to select the FM band.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired FM
radio station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no FM radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
■ Clearing preset FM radio stations
Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
Press FM to select the FM band.
2
Press OPTION.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
01:FM98.50MHz
PRESET
VOL.
ClearPreset
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset station to be cleared
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:Cleared
Cursor keys
Numeric keys
(RX-S600D)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 54 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) En 55
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
DAB
ZONE 2
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
DAB
ZONE
2
INFO
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.45).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
ProgramType
INFO
Item name
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SL SR
CLASSICS
9850
Information
(RX-S600D)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 55 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 56
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable* (not
supplied) is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple
Composite AV Cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit,
and connect your TV and the unit with a video pin cable (p.23). To select a video,
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.58).
* You cannot use the Apple Composite AV Cable with the iPod which has the
Lightning connector, or the iPod which does not support the video playback.
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours.
If “Network Standby” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
change without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playing back iPod music
Made for.
iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
iPad (4th and 3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad, iPad mini
(as of July 2013)
RADIO
VIDEO AUX
AUDI O VID EO
5V
2.1A
The unit (front)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
Connected
USB
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 56 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 57
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.58).
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.58).
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.59) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
1/2
Music
Videos
iPod
Top
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
iPod
Now Playing
5:10
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
1
4
5
2
3
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
iPod
Music
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/6
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
AM
DISPLAY
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 57 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 58
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.59) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding down).
j
1
2
iPod
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
5:10
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Operational remote control
keys
Function
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
a
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
d
s Stops playback.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (while holding
down).
j
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
LT
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
MODE
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 58 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 59
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 59 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 60
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
• The unit does not support a USB hub.
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
RADIO
VIDEO AUX
AUDI O VID EO
5V
2.1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
Connected
USB
1/12
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
USB
Top
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
AM
USB
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 60 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 61
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.62) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
USB
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/12
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
USB
Top
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
DISPLAY
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 61 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 62
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.62) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
1
2
USB
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
DI
S
PLA
Y
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 62 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 63
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.29). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files.
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
1
Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
2
In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
1/4
DESKTOP
NAS A
NAS B
NOTE
SERVER
Top
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
ENTER
NET
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 63 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 64
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.65) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
SERVER
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/14
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
SERVER
NAS A
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
DISPLAY
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 64 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 65
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.65) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.91).
■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or
“Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
1
2
SERVER
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Item Setting Function
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
DI
S
PLA
Y
S
ET
U
P
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 65 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 66
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.29). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the
following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need
the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account.
You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Information” (p.90) in
the “Setup” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
Listening to Internet radio
1/7
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
NET RADIO
Top
Station Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
NET RADIO
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
DISPLAY
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 66 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 67
■ Browse screen
1 List name
2 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3 Item number/total
4 Playback indicator
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
• Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/7
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
NET RADIO
Top
1
2
Station Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
NET RADIO
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
ENTER
Cursor keys
External device
operation key
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 67 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 68
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.29). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.90) in the “Setup”
menu.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later,
Mac with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or
later.
(as of July 2013)
PC
iTunes
Router
Playback starts
iPod
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
The unit
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 68 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 69
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.77) in the “Option”
menu to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in
advance.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
2
1
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
AirPlay
Now Playing
5:30
External device
operation keys
Function
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
iTunes (example of English version)
Check this box
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
External device
operation keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 69 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 70
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input
sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in
another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main
zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM or DAB/FM radio), and USB and network
sources can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in
Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 4–5 or AUDIO 2
jacks) of the unit.
• The party mode (p.72) allows you to play back the same audio output in main zone
as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type.
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker
cables.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power
Amp Assign” (p.81) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
Living room (main zone)
Study room (Zone2)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers or an external amplifier.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit
or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will
appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
12
39
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 70 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 71
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
ET
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
P
R
OG
RA
M
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
2
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
MAIN/ZONE2
RECEIVER z
Controlling Zone2
1
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2
Press RECEIVER z.
Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or
disabled.
When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the
front display.
• You can enable/disable Zone2 output using the ZONE key on the front panel
(p.8).
3
Use the following keys to select an input source.
AV 4–5: AV 4–5 (AUDIO) jacks
AUDIO 2: AUDIO 2 jacks
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX jack
FM: FM radio
AM: AM radio (RX-S600)
DAB: DAB radio (RX-S600D)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired
network source)
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
• It is useful to assign the frequently-used input to the SCENE key (p.72).
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) (p.44)
• Listening to DAB/FM radio (RX-S600D) (p.48)
• Playing back iPod music (p.56)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.60)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.63)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.66)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.68)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
to control Zone2.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP
repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of
time.
• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE.
• Use an infrared repeater commercially available to operate the unit and
external devices from Zone2. You can also control Zone2 by using the
application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”. Visit the Yamaha
website for details.
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
(RX-S600)
Input selection keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 71 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 72
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
M
N
E
2
M
O
DE
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
PARTY
SCENE
MAIN/ZONE2
■ Selecting the input source with the SCENE
function
You can use the SCENE function to select the input source for
Zone2 playback.
• To use the SCENE function in Zone2, you must configure scene assignments
separately from the main zone settings.
• You can register only the input source to the SCENE key. By default, the following
settings are registered for each scene.
–BD/DVD: AV 4
– TV: AUDIO 2
– NET: NET RADIO
– RADIO: TUNER
1
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2
Press SCENE.
The input source registered to the corresponding scene is
selected and Zone2 output is enabled.
❑ Configuring scene assignments
1
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2
Select a Zone2 input source.
3
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
Input selection keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 72 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 73
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the current status
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
AudioDecoder
Item name
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
ProLogic
Information
Input source group Item
HDMI 1–5
AV 1–5
AUDIO 1–2
V-AUX
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
TUNER (DAB)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.50) for
details.
TUNER (FM)
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.47).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
INFO
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 73 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 74
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available.
For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
ToneControl
OPTION
Tone Control
DSP/Surround
Volume Trim
Lipsync
Signal Info
Audio In
Option
Item Function Page
Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
75
DSP/Surround
(DSP/Surround)
DSP Level
(DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level. 75
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
75
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 75
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 76
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 76
Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup”
menu.
76
Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 76
Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source
with an audio jack of others.
77
Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 77
Auto Preset (Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.
45, 53
Clear Preset (Clear Preset)
(RX-S600)
Clears FM/AM radio stations (p.46) registered to
preset numbers.
(RX-S600D)
Clears DAB radio stations (p.50) or FM radio stations
(p.54) registered to preset numbers.
—
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 74 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 75
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)
Configures the sound field program and surround settings.
❑ DSP Level (DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Setting range
-6 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments)
Default
0 dB
❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.43).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.43).
Settings
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources) : On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
Traffic Program (TrafficProgram)
(RX-S600 U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
47
Init Scan (Init Scan)
(RX-S600D only)
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
48
Tune Aid (Tune Aid)
(RX-S600D only)
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel
label.
51
Repeat (Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.59),
USB storage device (p.62), or media server (p.65).
—
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.59),
USB storage device (p.62), or media server (p.65).
—
Volume Interlock (Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod
via AirPlay.
77
Item Function Page
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 75 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 76
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
■ Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.86) in the “Setup” menu.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
Default
AirPlay: Off (Off)
Others: On (On)
■ Signal Info (Signal Info)
Displays information about the video/audio signal.
Choices
• To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.
Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal
Channel (CHAN)
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels,
and LFE.
Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Input (V IN) Type and resolution of input signal
Output (V OUT) Type and resolution of output signal
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 76 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 77
■ Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–5 or AV 1–3) with an
audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–3
■ Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV 1” or “AUDIO 1” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio
jacks with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV 4”, “AV 5”, or “AUDIO 2”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding
audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.
■ Video Out (Video Out)
Selects a video to be output with radio sounds.
Settings
■ Volume Interlock (Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Settings
Off (Off) (default) Does not output video.
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–5,
V-AUX
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited (Ltd)
(default)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80
dB to 0 dB and mute).
Full (Full)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 77 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 78
CONFIGURATIONS
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.
• If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen (p.98).
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 78 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 79
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Configuration
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 81
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 81
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 81
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 81
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 82
Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 82
Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 82
Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 82
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 82
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 82
Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 83
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 83
HDMI Configuration
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 84
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 84
Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 84
TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 84
Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 85
ARC Enables/disables ARC. 85
SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 85
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 79 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 80
Sound
DSP Parameter
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 85
Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 85
Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 86
Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 86
Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 86
Lipsync
Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 86
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 86
Volum e
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 87
Main Zone Max Volume Sets the main zone maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 87
Main Zone Initial Volume Sets the main zone initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 87
Zone2 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 87
Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the Zone2 is turned on. 87
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 88
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 88
Function
Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 88
Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 89
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 89
DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 89
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 89
Network
Information Displays the network information on the unit. 90
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 90
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 91
DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 91
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 91
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 91
Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 92
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 92
Menu Item Function Page
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 80 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 81
Speaker
Configures the speaker settings manually.
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
❑ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are
possible using the Zone2 speakers or bi-amp connection.
Settings
❑ Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
Settings
❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
❑ Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Basic (default)
Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection).
BI-AMP
Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.17).
Zone2
Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.70) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Use (default)
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.
The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 81 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 82
❑ Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• “Surround” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone2”.
❑ Crossover
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker
whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
❑ Subwoofer Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the
subwoofer phase.
Settings
❑ Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft)
Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
Others: -1.0 dB
• By using test tones, you can make an adjustment while confirming its effect.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Normal (default) Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.
Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Off (default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On
Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
low-frequency components.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 82 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 83
■ Equalizer
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
❑ EQ Select
Selects the type of equalizer to be used.
Settings
• “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.32).
• By using test tones, you can make an adjustment while confirming its effect.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select
the desired speaker channel.
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor
keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
PEQ
Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO
measurement (p.32).
GEQ (default)
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Off Does not use the equalizer.
Equalizer
EQ Select
GEQ Edit
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz
GEQ
Front L
Back: RETURN
Off (default) Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 83 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 84
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■ Configuration
❑ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.111).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.111) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
HDMI OUT (TV)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
❑ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (HDMI 1–5) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the
standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
❑ TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV 1–5, AUDIO 1–2
Default
AUDIO 1
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”,
and “SCENE”.
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 84 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 85
❑ Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
❑ ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.19) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑ SCENE
Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected
to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection.
• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device
• Playback device: starting playback
Choices (SCENE keys)
BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO
Settings
Default
BD/DVD, TV: On
NET, RADIO: Off
• SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend
using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively.
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ DSP Parameter
Configures the surround decoder settings.
❑ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.41). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo).
Settings
❑ Panorama
Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is
enabled, you can wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a
spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is
effective when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Settings
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto (default)
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off Disables ARC.
On (default) Enables ARC.
Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off (default) Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
DSP Parameter
Lipsync
Volume
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 85 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 86
❑ Center Width
Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective
when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Setting range
0 to 7
Default
3
❑ Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to
strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This
setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected.
Setting range
-3 to +3
Default
0
❑ Center Image
Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher
to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken
(more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 1.0
Default
0.3
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
• You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.76) in the “Option” menu.
❑ Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.
❑ Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to
“Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
0 ms
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Auto (default)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 86 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 87
■ Volume
Configures the volume settings.
❑ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
❑ Main Zone Max Volume
Sets the main zone maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
❑ Main Zone Initial Volume
Sets the main zone initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
❑ Zone2 Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.81) is set to “Zone2”.
❑ Zone2 Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the Zone2 is turned on.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.81) is set to “Zone2”.
Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Min/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off (default)
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
Off (default)
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments)
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 87 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 88
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the
unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■ Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.
Input sources
HDMI 1–5, AV 1–5, AUDIO 1–2, USB, V-AUX
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press
ENTER.
• To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the
cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Auto Power Standby
ECO Mode
Off (default) Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Input Rename
Dimmer
Memory Guard
DC OUT
Party Mode Set
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 88 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 89
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.
3
To confirm the new name, press ENTER.
• To cancel the entry, press RETURN.
4
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Dimmer
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.88) is set to “On”.
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
■ DC OUT
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.
❑ Power Mode
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT
jack.
Settings
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.72).
Settings
Input Rename
Blu-ray
HDMI1
OK:ENTER
CANCEL:RETURN
Off (default) Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Continuous (default)
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.
Power Sync.
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the unit is turned
on.
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable (default)
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
o
Memory Guard
Memory Guard On
Back:RETURN
Icon
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 89 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 90
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
❑ DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack
MAC Address MAC address
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner)
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Information
IP Address
MAC Address Filter
DMC Control
Network Standby
Network Name
Network Update
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On (default)
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 90 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 91
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑ Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
❑ MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10).
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.
3
To confirm the new name, press ENTER.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.
Off (default) Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Network Name
Yamaha xxxxxx
Back:RETURN
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 91 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 92
■ Network Update
Updates the firmware via the network.
❑ Perform Update
Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.98).
❑ Firmware Version
Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.
❑ System ID
Displays the system ID number.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• Japanese and Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
English (default) English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Setup
English
日本語
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
Italiano
中文
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 92 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 93
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
z (power).
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD)
for more than 3 seconds.
To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (TV) for
more than 3 seconds.
• The registered remote control codes (p.95) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item Function Page
SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 93
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 93
TU
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
94
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 94
INIT Restores the default settings. 94
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 94
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 94
z (power)
PROGRAMSTRAIGHT
6 MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit.
8 MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
SPIMP.6MIN
REMOTEIDID1
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 93 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 94
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it
is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images
on the TV screen do not appear correctly.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the envelope icon (p) will appear in the screen. In this
case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via
the network” (p.98).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default)
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
TUFM50/AM9
TVFORMATNTSC
INITCANCEL
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
UPDATEUSB
VERSIONxx.xx
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 94 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 95
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.
• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
Registering the remote control code for a TV
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.96). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3
Press TV z.
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
■ TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
Controlling external devices with the remote control
TV operation keys
INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV CH Switch the channels of the TV
TV z Turns on/off the TV.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
CODE SET
TV z
SOURCE
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 95 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 96
Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3
Press the input selection key.
For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code
for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack.
4
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.37).
■ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in
orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green).
For example, if you register the remote control code of your BD/DVD player on
HDMI 1, you can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER, and the BD/DVD
player after pressing SOURCE.
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.
Menu operation
keys
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
DISPLAY Switches information on the display.
External device
operation keys
TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
POP-UP
MENU
Displays the pop-up menu.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
a
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
h
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
j
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Numeric keys Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys Control the TV (p.95).
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
CODE SET
DISPLAY
SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER
External device
operation keys
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
Menu operation keys
Input selection keys
External device
operation keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 96 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 97
Resetting remote control codes
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.
1
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2
Press the input selection key.
3
Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.
Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
To reset the remote control to factory default settings
a Press CODE SET.
b Press RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
S
ET
U
P
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
CODE SET
SOURCE
RECEIVER
Numeric keys
Input selection keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 97 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 98
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.94).
1
Press SETUP.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Update” and
press ENTER.
If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears
in the screen.
• To cancel the operation without updating the firmware, press SETUP.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Perform Update” and
press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update
starts.
5
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press z (power) on the
front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the
wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.60).
• To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via
HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.94).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
p
Update:ENTER
Network Update
Perform Update
Firmware Version
System ID
x.xx
xxxxxxxx
Back: RETURN
Icon
TV VOL TV CH
TV
INPUT
MUTE
CODE SET
90
10
ENT
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
MEMORY
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
SETUP OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
FM
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
MODE
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SOURCE
RECEIVER
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
5
4
1234
12
52
31
SUR. DECODE
V-AUX
USB
AM
TV
VO
T
L
V
C
H
TV
INP
U
T
MUTE
CO
DE
S
E
T
9
0
10
ENT
5
6
8
1 2
3
4
MO
VIE
E
NHANCE
R
T
U
NIN
G
P
R
E
S
ET
MEM
O
RY
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
P
TI
O
N
T
OP MENU
M
U
T
E
P
R
OG
RA
M
V
O
L
U
M
E
P
O
P-UP
/
MEN
U
DIREC
T
S
TRAI
GH
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
FM
PART
Y
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
NE
T
M
O
DE
SC
EN
E
BD
DV
D
TV
NET
RADI
O
SO
UR
C
E
R
E
C
EIVE
R
HDMI
AV
A
U
DI
O
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
5
1
3
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
V
-
AUX
US
B
AM
SETUP
ENTER
Cursor keys
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 98 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 99
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize
the speaker settings again (p.32). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,
use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.81).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.87).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.87).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.76).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.111). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the
front display when selecting an input source...
By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the
front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like,
use “Input Rename” (p.88) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the
presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.89).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.93).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode…
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 99 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 100
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator
on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the
AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.16).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.88).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.93).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.16).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the
AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 100 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 101
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.93).
The remote control is set to operate the other zone. Set the remote control to operate the desired zone (p.71).
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
The remote control is set to control the unit.
Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights
up in green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
Set the remote control code again (p.95). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be
controlled using the remote control.
A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to
HDMI 5.
Reset the remote control code registered to HDMI 5 (p.97).
The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.
Problem Cause Remedy
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 101 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 102
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.76).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.87).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.76).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.83).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform YPAO (p.32) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.81).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform YPAO (p.32) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.82).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
Unintended sound is coming from the surround
speaker.
“Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone2”.
When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone2”,
you cannot use the surround speakers. To use the surround speakers, set “Power
Amp Assign” to “Basic” (p.81).
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.82).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.32) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.81).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.84).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 102 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 103
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.21).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.84).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.85). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.76). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.88).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 103 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 104
Video
FM/AM radio
(AM radio feature is available only on RX-S600.)
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about
video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.76). For information about video signals supported
by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.113).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.19 to 22).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.44).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.44).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.44).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.45).
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 104 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 105
DAB radio (RX-S600D)
Problem Cause Remedy
No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.48).
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.51), and adjust
the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a
listing of the DAB coverage in your area.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.51), and adjust
the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service
or may not provide information.
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 105 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 106
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.90). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.90).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.63).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.91).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.63).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
Controller” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.91).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.60).
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 106 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 107
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.63).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.56).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.29).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
MHL Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile
device.
Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.93).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.63). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 107 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 108
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 108 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 109
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission
that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL
complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 109 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 110
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 110 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 111
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.19) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.24).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.37)
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.96)
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT VIDEO
in
VIDEO in
COMPONENT VIDEO
out
VIDEO out
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 111 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 112
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.84) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby
Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”).
3
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
4
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
5
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
6
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 112 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 113
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 113 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 114
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
SPEAKERS
CENTER
EXTRA SP
FRONT
NETWORK
DC OUT
AV
5
AUDIO
2
AUDIO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
AV
4
AV
1
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO 1
(
TV
)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CONPONENT
VIDEO
YPB PR
AV
2
AV
3
HDMI 4HDMI 3HDMI 2HDMI 1
HDMI
OUT
ARC
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 5
SURROUND / ZONE 2
/BI-AMP
MHL
5V
1A
5V
0.5A
(
NET
)
YPB PR
ANTENNA
AM
FM
75
(
RADIO
)
(RX-S600 U.S.A. model)
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 114 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 115
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195;
7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that
an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically
to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad
may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS
and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or
service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
(For RX-S600D)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Trademarks
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 115 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 116
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 4 (AV 4–5, AUDIO 2, V-AUX [Mini Jack])
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AV 1, AUDIO 1)
Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)
•Video
Composite x 4 (AV 3–5, V-AUX)
Component x 2 (AV 1–2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 5 (HDMI 1–5*)
* HDMI 5: MHL input compatible
• Other jacks
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R*)
* Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND, BI-AMP
(FRONT L/R), ZONE2]
- Subwoofer Out x 1
- AUDIO OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• DC OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
MHL
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[RX-S600 U.K. model]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-S600 Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-S600D U.K. and Europe models]
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[RX-S600D Australia model]
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
Specifications
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 116 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 117
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic II Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
(
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8
)
Front L/R .................................................................55 W+55 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 )
Front L/R .................................................................60 W+60 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8)
Front L/R .................................................................65 W+65 W
Center ............................................................................... 65 W
Surround L/R...........................................................65 W+65 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6)
Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W
Center ............................................................................... 80 W
Surround L/R...........................................................80 W+80 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R ...................................................................... 80 W/ch
Center ......................................................................... 80 W/ch
Surround...................................................................... 80 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )
Front L/R ...................................................................... 95 W/ch
Center ......................................................................... 95 W/ch
Surround L/R................................................................ 95 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (
JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6
)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
Front L/R.....................................................................125 W/ch
Center.........................................................................125 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ).....................................90/110/140/160 W
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 ).............................. 200 mV/47 k
• Maximum Input Signal
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT....................................................... 200 mV/1.2 k
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 1 V/1.2 k
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 ).............................100 mV/470
• Frequency Response
AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV 5 etc.
(Input Shorted 2 V, Speaker Out)
.........................................................................108 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround).................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC
[Other models] .................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75
Component
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75
Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75
• Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono ................................................................................70 dB
Stereo...............................................................................69 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono ................................................................................. 0.3%
Stereo................................................................................ 0.5%
• Antenna Input................................................ 75 unbalanced
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 117 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 118
AM Section (RX-S600)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB Section (RX-S600D)
• Tuning Range ..........................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
• Support Audio Format
.......................... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG 4 HE AAC v2 (AAC+)
• Antenna .........................................................75 unbalanced
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............. AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................220 W/300 VA
[Other models]................................................................ 220 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off...............0.1 W or less
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)
...........................................................................1.0 W (Typical)
Network Standby On .........................................2.0 W (Typical)
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]............................................. 480 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
...................... 435 x 111 x 320 mm (17-1/8” x 4-3/8” x 12-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Weight............................................................. 7.8 kg (17.2 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 118 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 119
Symbols
Envelope icon (p) 98
Lock icon (o) 89
Numerics
2.1-channel system 14
2ch Stereo (sound program) 40
3.1-channel system 14
4.1-channel system 14
4K Ultra HD 113
5.1-channel system 14
5ch Stereo (sound program) 40
A
A.DRC (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 75
Access denied (error indication) 107
Access error (error indication) 107
Action Game (sound program) 39
Adaptive DRC (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 75
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 86
ADVANCED SETUP menu 93
Adventure (sound program) 39
AirPlay 68
AM antenna connection 28
AM radio listening 44
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 84
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 19
ARC (HDMI, Setup menu) 85
Audio Decoder (front display information) 73
Audio device connection 27
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 63
Audio file format (USB storage device) 60
Audio In (Option menu) 77
AUDIO jack 18
Audio Mode (DAB) 50
AUDIO OUT jack 10
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 84
Audio recording device connection 30
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 19
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 88
Auto Preset (FM radio, Option menu) 45
Automatic speaker setting optimization 32
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 45
AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 88
B
B RATE (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Banana plug 16
Basic playback operation 36
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 75
BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 81
Bi-amp speaker connection 17
Bitrate (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Bitstream 113
C
CAT-5 cable 29
Cellar Club (sound program) 40
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
Center Image (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 86
Center Width (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 86
CH Label/Freq. (DAB) 50
Chamber (sound program) 40
CHAN (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Channel (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Check SP Wires (error indication) 107
CINEMA DSP 39
CINEMA DSP 3D 41
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85
Clear Preset (DAB radio, Option menu) 50
Clear Preset (FM radio, Option menu) 54
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio, Option menu) 46
Clock Time (Radio Data System) 47
COAXIAL jack 18
Component video cable 18
Component video connection (video device) 25
COMPONENT VIDEO jack 18
Composite video connection (video device) 25
Compressed Music Enhancer 43
Configuration (HDMI, Setup menu) 84
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
Crossover (Speaker, Setup menu) 82
Crossover frequency setting 82
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 32
D
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 48
DAB information 50
DAB radio listening 48
DAB radio tuning 48
DAB/FM antenna connection 28
DAB+ 48
Date And Time (DAB) 50
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 89
DC OUT jack 10
Decoder Off (front display information) 73
Default Gateway (Information, Setup menu) 90
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 90
Default setting restoration 94
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 90
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) 48
Digital coaxial cable 18
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 91
Digital optical cable 18
Dimension (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 86
Dimmer (Function, Setup menu) 89
DIRECT (sound mode) 42
Direct playback 42
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 108
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 82
DLNA 63
DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) (DAB) 50
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 91
Index
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 119 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 120
DMC Control (Network, Setup menu) 91
DNS Server (Information, Setup menu) 90
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 90
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 42
Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 42
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 42
Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 42
Drama (sound program) 39
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 108
DSP Level (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 75
DSP Parameter (Sound, Setup menu) 85
DSP Program (front display information) 73
DSP/Surround (Option menu) 75
DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 42
DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 42
Dynamic Range (Volume, Setup menu) 87
E
ECO (Setup menu) 88
ECO Mode (Setup menu) 88
Enhancer (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 75
ENHANCER (sound mode) 43
Ensemble Label (DAB) 50
EQ Select (Equalizer, Setup menu) 83
Equalizer (Speaker, Setup menu) 83
Error indication (front display) 107
External device control (remote control) 95
External device operation key (remote control) 11
Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 82
F
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 91
Firmware update 94
Firmware update (network) 94
, 98
Firmware update (USB) 94
Firmware Version (Network Update, Setup menu) 92
Firmware version check 94
FM antenna connection 28
FM radio listening 44
FM radio tuning 52
FM/AM radio tuning 44
FORMAT (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Format (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Frequency (FM radio) 52
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 44
Frequency step setting 44
, 94
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
Front display (part names and functions) 9
Front display brightness 89
Front display information 73
Front panel (part names and functions) 8
Front panel jack connection 27
Function (Setup menu) 88
G
GEQ (Equalizer, Setup menu) 83
H
Hall in Munich (sound program) 40
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 40
HDMI (Setup menu) 84
HDMI cable 18
HDMI connection (video device) 24
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 84
HDMI jack 18
HDMI OUT (TV) (Audio Output, Setup menu) 84
HDMI signal compatibility 113
Headphones 43
High definition audio 113
High speed HDMI cable 18
I
In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 76
Indicator (part names and functions) 9
INFO key 8
, 11
Information (Network, Setup menu) 90
Information display (front display) 9
Information switching (front display) 73
INIT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94
Init Scan (DAB radio, Option menu) 48
Initial scan (DAB radio) 48
Input (front display information) 73
Input (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Input Rename (Function, Setup menu) 88
Input selection key (remote control) 11
Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 76
Interlock (Option menu) 77
Internal Err. (YPAO error message) 34
Internal Error (error indication) 107
Internet radio listening 66
IP Address (Information, Setup menu) 90
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 90
iPod charge 56
iPod connection 56
iPod content playback 57
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 68
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 68
L
Language (Setup menu) 92
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 82
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 35
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 109
Lipsync 109
Lipsync (Option menu) 76
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 86
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 109
M
MAC Address (Information, Setup menu) 90
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 91
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 91
Main Zone Initial Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87
Main Zone Max Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87
Manual station preset (FM radio) 53
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 45
Media sharing setup 63
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 89
Menu language selection 31
Menu operation key (remote control) 11
MHL cable 18
MHL connection 24
MHL jack 18
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 120 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 121
MHL Overloaded (error indication) 107
MHL-compatible device 24
MODE key 11
Monaural reception (FM radio) 44
Mono Movie (sound program) 39
MOVIE (sound program category) 39
Multiple room playback 70
Multi-zone 70
MUSIC (sound program category) 40
Music Video (sound program) 40
MUTE key 11
Muting 36
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) 29
NAS connection 29
NAS content playback 63
Network (Setup menu) 90
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 29
Network cable 29
Network connection 29
Network information 90
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 91
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 91
Network Update (Network, Setup menu) 92
No content (error indication) 107
No device (error indication) 107
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 34
No MIC (YPAO error message) 34
No Signal (YPAO error message) 34
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 34
Noisy (YPAO error message) 34
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94
Numeric key (remote control) 11
O
OPTICAL jack 18
OPTION key 11
Option menu 74
Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 35
Output (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 35
P
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94
Panorama (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85
PARTY key 11
Party mode 72
Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 89
PC connection 29
PC content playback 63
PEQ (Equalizer, Setup menu) 83
Perform Update (Network Update, Setup menu) 92
PHONES jack 8
Playback device connection 24
Playback device operation (remote control) 96
Please wait (error indication) 107
Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
Power cable connection 30
Power management 88
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 89
Preset station selection (DAB radio) 49
Preset station selection (FM radio) 54
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 46
Program Service (Radio Data System) 47
Program Type (DAB) 50
Program Type (Radio Data System) 47
R
Radio Data System (FM radio) 47
Radio Data System information 47
Radio Data System tuning 47
Radio Text (Radio Data System) 47
Rear panel (part names and functions) 10
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 107
Remote control (part names and functions) 11
Remote control code registration
(playback device) 96
Remote control code registration (TV) 95
Remote Control Code Search 95
, 96
Remote control ID setting 93
Remote control ID setting (remote control) 93
Remote control sensor 8
Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 11
REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 93
Rename (input name) 88
Rename (network name) 91
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 59
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 65
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 62
Reset (remote control) 97
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 39
Router connection 29
S
SAMPL (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
Sampling (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
SCENE (HDMI, Setup menu) 85
Scene configuration 37
SCENE function 37
SCENE link playback 37
Sci-Fi (sound program) 39
Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 86
Service Label (DAB) 50
SETUP key 11
Setup menu 78
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 59
Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 65
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 62
Signal Info (Option menu) 76
Signal information 76
Signal Quality (DAB) 50
SILENT CINEMA 43
Simple play (iPod) 58
SLEEP key 11
Sleep timer 11
Sleep timer (Zone2) 71
Sound (Setup menu) 85
Sound field effect 39
Sound mode selection 38
Sound program 39
, 40
SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 93
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 121 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
APPENDIX ➤ Index En 122
Speaker (Setup menu) 81
Speaker cable connection 16
Speaker connection 16
Speaker impedance 13
Speaker impedance setting 15
, 93
Speaker indicator (front display) 9
Speaker placement 13
Spectacle (sound program) 39
Sports (sound program) 39
Standard (sound program) 39
Standby indicator (front panel) 8
Standby Sync (HDMI, Setup menu) 85
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 84
Station preset (DAB radio) 49
Station preset (FM radio) 53
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 45
Status (Information, Setup menu) 90
Stereo mini jack 18
Stereo mini-plug cable 18
Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 18
Stereo reception (FM radio) 44
STP network cable 29
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 41
Straight decode 41
Subnet Mask (Information, Setup menu) 90
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 90
Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 81
Subwoofer connection 17
Subwoofer Phase (Speaker, Setup menu) 82
Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 76
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 42
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 82
Surround decoder 42
SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 76
System ID (Network Update, Setup menu) 92
T
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 83
The Bottom Line (sound program) 40
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 40
Tone Control (Option menu) 75
TP (Traffic Program) 47
Traffic information (Radio Data System) 47
Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 47
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 75
TU (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94
Tune Aid (DAB radio, Option menu) 51
TV Audio Input (HDMI, Setup menu) 84
TV connection 19
TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 19
TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 21
TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 22
TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 23
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94
TV operation (remote control) 95
TV operation key (remote control) 11
U
Unable to play (error indication) 107
UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94
USB jack 8
USB mass storage class device 60
USB storage device connection 60
USB storage device content playback 60
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 34
V
V IN (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
V OUT (Signal Info, Option menu) 76
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94
Version error (error indication) 107
VIDEO AUX jack 8
Video device connection 24
VIDEO jack 18
Video Out (Option menu) 77
Video pin cable 18
Video signal flow 111
Video signal type setting 94
Video/audio input jack combination 26
Virtual CINEMA DSP 41
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7
Voltage selection 30
VOLTAGE SELECTOR 10
Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 87
Volume Interlock (Option menu) 77
Volume Trim (Option menu) 76
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7
vTuner ID (Information, Setup menu) 90
Y
Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 32
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer 32
YPAO error message 34
YPAO MIC jack 8
YPAO microphone 32
YPAO warning message 35
Z
Zone2 (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 81
Zone2 Initial Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87
Zone2 Max Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87
Zone2 speaker connection 17
, 70
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 122 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
© 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF616A0/EN
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 123 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM
Documenttranscriptie
RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 1 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 2 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 FEATURES 6 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 32 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 PLAYBACK 36 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch PREPARATIONS 12 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting Zone2 speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 5 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 7 Connecting audio recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Preparing the DAB tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Selecting a DAB radio station for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Displaying the DAB information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 En 2 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 3 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . 93 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 APPENDIX 99 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-S600.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 CONFIGURATIONS 78 DAB radio (RX-S600D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 En 3 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 4 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 En 4 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 5 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna (RX-S600) FM antenna (RX-S600) *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. DAB/FM antenna (RX-S600D) YPAO microphone • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-S600 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified. CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 5 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 6 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone/iPad . p.56 • USB . p.60 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.63 • Internet radio . p.66 • AirPlay . p.68 Supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.32 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) . p.39 • Enjoying compressed music with . p.43 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) • Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.70 (multi-zone) Network contents Speakers Audio iPod/iPhone/iPad Audio USB device HDMI Control 3D and 4K Ultra HD signals supported Audio HDMI Control BD/DVD player Audio/Video Audio/Video AV receiver (the unit) TV Control Audio/Video (via HDMI or MHL) Smartphone/Tablet Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.37 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control FEATURES ➤ . p.111 What you can do with the unit En 6 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 7 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.24) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.39) The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you to create a 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.26). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.86). BD/DVD player I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.84). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. Set-top box Game console Camcorder I want to use the supplied remote control to operate external devices… TV Register the remote control codes of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.95). ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.19) When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio Video from external device ❑ Easy operation and wireless music playback from iPhone or Android device By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details. ❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.42) When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.31). I want to update the firmware... ❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.44)(RX-S600) ❑ Listening to DAB radio (p.48) and FM radio (p.52) (RX-S600D) ❑ Easy operation with a TV screen You can operate the iPod or USB storage device, view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. ❑ Low power consumption Use “Network Update” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu or “UPDATE” (p.94) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware. Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • SCENE settings (p.37) • Sound/video settings and signal information for each source (p.74) • Various function settings (p.79) • System settings (p.93) The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption and helps to create an eco-friendly home theater system (p.88). FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 8 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Part names and functions Front panel 1 INPUT 2 ZONE 3 4 5 VOLUME DIRECT INFO SCENE PHONES YPAO MIC STRAIGHT PROGRAM BD/DVD TV NET SILENT CINEMA 6 1 ZONE key Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.71). 2 INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.73). 3 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 4 Front display Displays information (p.9). 5 DIRECT key Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.42). 6 INPUT knob Select an input source. 789 RADIO VIDEO AUX AUDIO : A B C VIDEO D 7 z (power) key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 8 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.84) • Standby Through is enabled (p.84) • Network Standby is enabled (p.91) • An iPod is being charged (p.56) 9 PHONES jack For connecting headphones. 0 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.32). A STRAIGHT key 5V 2.1A E F (RX-S600 U.S.A. model) B PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.38). C SCENE keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.37). D VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game consoles (p.27). E USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.60) or an iPod (p.56). F VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.41). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 9 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 4 56 ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC STEREO PARTY 3 TUNED OUT 7 89 SLEEP ZONE 2 : VOL. MUTE L SL A 1 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 2 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.39) is working. CINEMA DSP n Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.41) is working. 3 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.43) is working. 4 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.75) is working. 5 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED B 6 PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.72) 7 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 8 ZONE2 Lights up when audio output to Zone2 is enabled (p.70). 9 MUTE A SW C R SR C C Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. L Subwoofer A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) Blinks when audio is muted. 0 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. A Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. B Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.73). Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station (RX-S600) or FM radio station (RX-S600D) signal. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 10 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Rear panel 2 1 3 45 6 7 (RX-S600 U.S.A. model) NETWORK HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI 3 HDMI 4 SPEAKERS ANTENNA AV 5 FRONT DC OUT (RADIO) AM VIDEO (NET) HDMI 5 MHL 5V 1A AV 1 5V FM 0.5A CENTER EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP 75 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT VIDEO AV 2 AV 3 COAXIAL SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO 8 Y 9 : A 1 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.19). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 2 HDMI 1–4 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.24). 3 HDMI 5/MHL jack For connecting to an HDMI- or MHL-compatible playback device and inputting video/audio signals (p.24). 4 ANTENNA jacks For connecting the radio antennas (p.28). 5 DC OUT jack PB PR * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. B C 7 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.30). 8 AV 1–5 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.24). 9 AUDIO 1–2 jacks For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.27). 0 AUDIO OUT jacks For outputting audio to a recording device (such as a tape deck) (p.30). A SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.16). D B MONITOR OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks: For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.23). VIDEO jack: For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and outputting video signals (p.23). C SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.16). D VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.30). For supplying power to a Yamaha AV accessory. For details on connections, refer to the instruction manual of the AV accessory. 6 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network (p.29). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 11 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 2 SOURCE z key RECEIVER SOURCE Turns on/off an external device. SOURCE key HDMI 1 2 3 4 Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.96). This key lights up in green after pressed. 5 AV 3 4 5 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TV PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU NET MUTE VOLUME SETUP OPTION Turns on/off (standby) the unit. G H I J ENTER 5 SCENE keys MEMORY TUNING Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.37). PRESET MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 6 PROGRAM keys Select a sound program (p.38). INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 7 External device operation keys Select menus for external devices (p.96). 8 SETUP key ENT Displays the setup menu (p.78). TV F 9 Menu operation keys INPUT TV VOL Select an input source for playback. HDMI 1–4 HDMI 1–4 jacks HDMI 5 HDMI 5/MHL jack AV 1–5 AV 1–5 jacks AUDIO 1–2 AUDIO 1–2 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jack (on the front panel) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) FM FM radio AM AM radio (RX-S600) DAB DAB radio (RX-S600D) Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.71). DISPLAY MODE MOVIE 3 Input selection keys 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch RETURN B C D E RECEIVER z key RADIO POP-UP/MENU 9 : A Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.96). This key lights up in orange after pressed. SCENE BD DVD 6 8 RECEIVER key AUDIO 1 TV CH MUTE CODE SET K Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Switchesd between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception (p.44, p.52). Switches the iPod operation modes (p.58). A Radio keys Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.44, p.48, p.52). MEMORY Registers radio stations as presets. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you play back and perform other operations for external devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is selected (p.96). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.38). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.73). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. F TV operation keys Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV operations (p.95). G PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.72). H VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. I MUTE key Mutes the audio output. J OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.74). K CODE SET key Registers remote control codes of external devices on the remote control (p.95). • To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote control code for each device before using (p.95). (RX-S600) FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 12 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers (p.13) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room. 2 Connecting speakers (p.16) Connect the speakers to the unit. 3 Connecting a TV (p.19) Connect a TV to the unit. 4 Connecting playback devices (p.24) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 5 Connecting the radio antennas (p.28) Connect the supplied FM/AM/DAB antennas to the unit. 6 Connecting to a network (p.29) Connect the unit to a network. 7 Connecting audio recording devices (p.30) Connect audio recording devices to the unit. 8 Connecting the power cable (p.30) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.31) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.32) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 12 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 13 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 6-ohm speakers. When connecting speakers with impedance of 8 ohm or more, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “8 MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.15). Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Abbr. Front (L) 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Subwoofer 9 Function Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● • You can use the Zone2 function or bi-amp connections simultaneously with the 2.1- or 3.1-channel system. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 13 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 14 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5.1-channel system 3.1-channel system 1 9 2 1 3 9 4 2 3 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 4.1-channel system 2.1-channel system 1 2 1 9 2 9 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 14 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 15 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Setting the speaker impedance Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 6-ohm speakers. When connecting speakers with impedance of 8 ohm or more, set the speaker impedance to “8 MIN”. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) 3 STRAIGHT Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.6MIN 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “8 MIN”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Placing speakers En 15 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 16 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1-channel system as examples. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system. Caution The unit (rear) SPEAKERS A • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. FRONT DC OUT AM • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. ■ Connecting speaker cables 5.1-channel system 5V FM CENTER 0.5A EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. 75 VIDEO SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT PB PR b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. Cables required for connection (commercially available) + (red) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. + b FR c ON T - + – 1 a d 2 Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer) - (black) 9 Using a banana plug 3 (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. 4 5 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. Banana plug a + FR ON T b PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 17 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. AUDIO Audio pin cable 2 AUDIO OUT SUBWO PRE OFER OUT When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND/ZONE 2/BI-AMP jacks. To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.81) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • Surround speakers cannot be used during bi-amp connections. Connecting Zone2 speakers The unit (rear) SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER 1 EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP The Zone2 function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). To connect the Zone2 speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.70). 2 3 9 • The FRONT jacks and SURROUND/ZONE 2/BI-AMP jacks output the same signals. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 18 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. HDMI cable Digital optical cable Component video cable OPTICAL AV 1 ❑ COAXIAL jacks • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission (through output) features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Digital coaxial cable AV 1 Video pin cable ❑ HDMI/MHL jack ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL cable. (Stereo L/R jacks) HDMI 5 MHL 5V 1A MHL cable • The HDMI 5/MHL jack of the unit supports both HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an HDMI-compatible playback device to the jack, use an HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL connection” (p.24). Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). AUDIO 2 Stereo pin cable (Stereo mini jack) Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable. Stereo mini-plug cable AUDIO PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 18 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 19 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks available on your TV. Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method. Does your TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes ■ Connection Method 1 (p.19) About Audio Return Channel (ARC) Yes ■ Connection Method 2 (p.21) ■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. No Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.111). ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. No Does your TV support HDMI Control? About HDMI Control Yes ■ Connection Method 3 (p.22) • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.84) in the “Setup” menu. • Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC. No The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack ■ Connection Method 4 (p.23) HDMI input (ARC-compatible) HDMI HDMI OUT ARC HDMI OUT When connecting a video device with an analog video output • If you will connect any video device to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.23). When using a set-top box to watch TV HDMI 2 CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR H HDMI AV 4 OPTICAL • If you will connect any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks (p.23). ARC ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI AV 5 VIDEO AV 1 AUDIO AV 2 AV 3 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO TV • Connect the set-top box to the unit in the same way as playback devices (p.24). If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit or configure the ARC setting. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 19 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 20 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Necessary settings To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings. 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV. b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. c Press SETUP. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU SETUP RETURN On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. SETUP OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER e Check the following. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. DISPLAY d Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. Setup Speaker Configuration • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. HDMI Sound ECO • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. Function Network Language • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.21). e Press ENTER again. f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.37), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). Configuration HDMI Control On Audio Output Auto Standby Through Auto TV Audio Input AUDIO 1 Standby Sync Auto ARC On SCENE Back: RETURN g Press SETUP. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 20 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 21 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV) ❑ Necessary settings Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.84) in the “Setup” menu. HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) ARC HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR ARC HDMI 2 H HDMI HDMI Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. AV 5 b Press SETUP. AUDIO AV 3 2 VIDEO AV 1 AV 2 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. HDMI input HDMI HDMI OUT 1 COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO AUDIO 1 (TV) O TOP MENU O POP-UP/MENU SETUP AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack SETUP OPTION TV Audio output (digital optical) Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Sound ECO Function Network Language d Press ENTER again. e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. Configuration HDMI Control On Audio Output Auto Standby Through Auto TV Audio Input AUDIO 1 Standby Sync Auto ARC On SCENE Back: RETURN f Press SETUP. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 21 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 22 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). ■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack HDMI input b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. HDMI c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. HDMI OUT d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. ARC HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR ARC HDMI 2 H HDMI HDMI AV 5 VIDEO AV 1 e Check the following. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. AUDIO AV 2 AV 3 COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO AUDIO 1 (TV) O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack O TV Audio output (digital optical) If you switch the input source of the unit to “AUDIO 1” using the AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) keys, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jack or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–5 and AUDIO 2 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.37), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.37), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 22 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 23 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks) ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. When connecting any video device to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio will be played back on the unit. MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) Video input (composite video) VIDEO VIDEO NE (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 PB PR HDMI 3 HDMI 5 1A ANTENNA AV 5 5V FM AM V MONITOR OUT DC OUT (RADIO) VIDEO V MHL 5V HDMI 4 0.5A 75 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT VIDEO SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT AUDIO 1 (TV) Y PB PR • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (TV) O O TV AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack • If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jack or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–5 and AUDIO 2 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.37), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). Audio output (digital optical) ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) Video input (component video) The unit (rear) PR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT Y Y (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 PB PR PB HDMI 3 PR PR PB PB Y Y PB HDMI 5 1A Y DC OUT (RADIO) AM VIDEO NE PR MHL 5V HDMI 4 ANTENNA AV 5 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks 5V FM 0.5A 75 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT VIDEO SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT AUDIO 1 (TV) Y PB PR OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (TV) O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack O TV Audio output (digital optical) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 23 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 24 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Connecting playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. – Connecting an iPod (p.56) – Connecting a USB storage device (p.60) ❑ MHL connection Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the mobile device. The HDMI 5/MHL jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit. Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) HDMI 5/MHL jack The unit (rear) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI 3 AM VIDEO FM 75 AUDIO 2 AV 3 HDMI 5 1A MHL 5V (RADIO) AV 1 AV 2 HDMI 5 1A MHL 5V HDMI 4 ANTENNA AV 5 COAXIAL AUDIO OUT SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL MHL output MHL COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO • If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.26). Y PB MHL Mobile device ■ HDMI connection Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 5, the video/audio played back on the mobile device will be output from the unit. HDMI 1–5 jacks (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 1A MHL 5V The unit (rear) HDMI OUT ARC • To watch videos input to the HDMI 5/MHL jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.19 to 22). (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI 3 AM VIDEO FM • You need to prepare an MHL cable that match the jack on your mobile device. HDMI 75 AUDIO 2 AV 3 HDMI output HDMI (RADIO) AV 1 AV 2 HDMI 5 1A MHL 5V HDMI 4 ANTENNA AV 5 COAXIAL AUDIO OUT SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL • You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself. HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO Y PB • If “Standby Through” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby mode. Video device • The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions. – The unit is turned on. If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–5, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. – The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–5 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.19 to 22). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 24 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 25 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Component video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Video Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Component video Y Audio Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 4–5 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Composite video Video output (component video) AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks CONPONENT VIDEO Input jacks on the unit Audio PB Video output (composite video) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR VIDEO PR PB AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jack Y PR HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 PB HDMI OUT H ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 PB VIDEO AV 4 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR V AV 5 Y VIDEO Y OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR AV 5 V VIDEO AV 1 AV 1 AUDIO COAXIAL AV 2 The unit (rear) COAXIAL AV 3 AV 2 AV 3 AUDIO 1 (TV) Video device COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO COAXIAL C VIDEO C COAXIAL O OPTICAL L OPTICAL Video device O AV 1 C AV 2 COAXIAL The unit (rear) L L R R R COAXIAL C AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack Audio output (digital optical or digital coaxial) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.23). Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack, AV 4–5 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (either digital coaxial or analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–5, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the AV 3–5 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.23). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 25 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 26 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Output jacks on video device Video 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. 2 Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. Input jacks on the unit Audio Video Audio HDMI 1–5 AV 1 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) 5 AV Digital optical Digital coaxial HDMI HDMI 1–5 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM F AM TOP MENU Component video Composite video Analog stereo HDMI 1–5 AV 4–5 (AUDIO) AUDIO 2 Analog stereo AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) AV 4–5 (AUDIO) AUDIO 2 AV 3 AV 1 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) Digital optical OPTION 3 4 For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. DISPLAY Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. VOL. AudioIn Video output (component video) COMPONENT VIDEO OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER ❑ Necessary setting AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks POP-UP/MENU SETUP RETURN AV 2 5 PR Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be used). VOL. PR HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR H PB PR Y PB PB AudioAV5 AV 5 Y VIDEO Y AV 1 AUDIO AV 2 AV 3 6 COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDIO 1 (TV) L VIDEO AUDIO L R This completes the necessary settings. L The unit (rear) R AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks R Press OPTION. Video device If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Audio output (analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 26 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 27 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as camcorders and portable audio players to the unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 4–5 (AUDIO) AUDIO 2 Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. DIRECT INFO SCENE PHONES YPAO MIC STRAIGHT PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VIDEO AUX AUDIO VIDEO 5V 2.1A V The unit (front) The unit (rear) OPTICAL O HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR O OPTICAL HDMI A AV 5 COAXIAL C C Portable audio player VIDEO COAXIAL AV 1 AUDIO 2 AV 2 AV 3 L COAXIAL COAXIAL AUDIO 1 (TV) L L R R Audio device VIDEO R AV 1–5 jacks AUDIO 1–2 jacks Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–5 or AUDIO 1–2, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.23). • You need to prepare the video/audio cables that match the output jacks on your device. • For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.56) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.60). • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output from the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 27 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 28 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 Connecting the radio antennas ■ FM/AM antennas (RX-S600) ■ DAB/FM antenna (RX-S600D) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. AM antenna DAB/FM antenna FM antenna The unit (rear) The unit (rear) NETWORK NETWORK HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI 3 HDMI OUT SPEAKERS FRONT DC OUT (RADIO) AM VIDEO (NET) HDMI 5 1A MHL 5V HDMI 4 ANTENNA AV 5 5V FM CENTER 0.5A EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZO /BI-AMP HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI 3 HDMI 4 SPEAKERS FRONT DC OUT (RADIO) 5V DAB/FM 75 VIDEO (NET) HDMI 5 1A MHL 5V ANTENNA AV 5 0.5A CENTER EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZO /BI-AMP 75 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT COAXIAL SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL AV 2 COMPONENT VIDEO COAXIAL SUBWOOFER PRE OUT MONITOR OUT AV 3 AUDIO 1 (TV) COAXIAL Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OUT VIDEO VIDEO AV 3 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 AV 1 AV 1 AV 2 ARC Y PB PR Assembling and connecting the AM antenna • The antenna should be stretched out horizontally. • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM antenna. Hold down Insert Release • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the radio antennas En 28 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 29 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6 Connecting to a network Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Internet • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. WAN PC LAN Modem Router Network cable NETWORK HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI 3 SPEAKERS FRONT DC OUT (RADIO) AM VIDEO (NET) HDMI 5 1A MHL 5V HDMI 4 ANTENNA AV 5 AV 1 5V FM 0.5A CENTER EXTRA SURROUND /BI-A 75 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT VIDEO AV 2 AV 3 COAXIAL SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO Y PB PR The unit (rear) • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.90). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 29 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 30 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 Connecting audio recording devices 8 Connecting the power cable You can connect audio recording devices to the AUDIO OUT jacks. These jacks output analog audio signals selected as the input. Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. • To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 4–5 jacks, AUDIO 2 jacks, or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit. • Be sure to use the AUDIO OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. The unit (rear) AUDIO OUT jacks • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. Audio input VOLTAGE SELECTOR HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 AUDIO OUT AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (RADIO) A VOLTAGE SELECTEOR L ANTENNA AV 5 VIDEO L L The unit (rear) AV 1 AUDIO 2 AV 2 AUDIO OUT R AV 3 220V 120V 240V R COAXIAL COAXIAL 110V R AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO AUDIO Audio recording device SPEAKERS T CENTER EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet SPEAKERS T CENTER EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting audio recording devices En 30 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 31 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z 9 Selecting an on-screen menu language HDMI 1 2 3 4 Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN 1 2 PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 6 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. SETUP 3 4 MEMORY Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER. MODE TUNING PRESET MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 Setup Speaker English HDMI 日本語 Français Deutsch Español Русский Italiano Sound ECO 8 Function Network ENT TV Language INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE 中文 TV TV CH CODE SET 5 Use the cursor keys to select the desired language. Setup Speaker English HDMI 日本語 Français Deutsch Español Русский Sound ECO Function Network Language Italiano 中文 PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 31 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 32 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears) and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. The unit (front) PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO • Please note the following when using YPAO. – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. 1 – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. – Do not connect headphones. 9 ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). YPAO microphone Listening 5 position 4 Ear height • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 8 TV MUTE 3 ENT INPUT TV VOL VOL 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE 2 – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. TV TV CH CODE SET 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN 9 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. The following screen appears on the TV. MAX Auto Setup Start Exit Press SETUP key to Start Power Amp Assign Basic PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 32 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 33 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or use the cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before starting the measurement. HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM USB MAIN • To change the internal amplifier assignment, use "Power Amp Assign" (p.81) in the "Setup" menu. AUDIO 1 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 6 • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. RADIO 5 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION SETUP • If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages. • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). SCENE BD DVD • A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display. AM PARTY ZONE 2 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.34) or “Warning messages” (p.35). To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start” and press SETUP. To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. Auto Setup The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the measurement immediately. Measurement Finished Start Exit SAVE Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING MOVIE INFO PRESET MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 4 SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3.0 / 10.5 m • If cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to the external device operation mode. In this case, press RECEIVER to set the remote control to the unit operation mode and then use the cursor keys. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. Auto Setup TV MUTE The adjusted speaker settings are applied. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. 8 ENT INPUT Start TV VOL VOL -3.0 / +10.0 dB • To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error messages” (p.34). TV TV CH CODE SET Exit Measurement Finished Result 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB OK:ENTER 1 2 7 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. 3 Caution 4 • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 1 The number of speakers (front side/rear side/subwoofer) 2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest) 3 Adjustment range of speaker output level 4 Warning message (if available) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 33 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 34 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Auto Setup Start ERROR E-5:Noisy Error message Exit PROCEED 5% TV screen VOL. E-5:NOISY L SL SW C R SR Front display ■ Procedure to handle errors 1 Check the content of error message and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. Error message Cause Remedy E-1:No Front SP (E-1:NO FRNT SP) Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP (E-2:NO SUR SP) One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-5:Noisy (E-5:NOISY) The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-7:No MIC (E-7:NO MIC) The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. E-8:No Signal (E-8:NO SIGNAL) The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel (E-9:CANCEL) The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. E-10:Internal Err. (E-10:INTERNAL) An internal error has occurred. Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. To exit the YPAO measurement: a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER. c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning: Select “RETRY” and press ENTER. To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only): Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 34 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 35 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Auto Setup Warning message Cause W-1:Out of Phase (W-1:PHASE) Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, exit YPAO, turn off the A speaker cable may be connected with the unit, and then reconnect the speaker cable. reverse polarity (+/-). Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2:Over Distance (W-2:DISTANCE) A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. Measurement Finished Start Result Exit 3 / 2 / 0.1 ch 3.0 / 10.5 m -3.0 / +10.0 dB OK:ENTER Warning message W-1:Out of Phase Remedy TV screen Problem speaker (blinks) W-3:Level Error (W-3:LEVEL) VOL. W-1:PHASE L SL SW C R SR Front display • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. ■ Procedure to handle warnings 1 Check the content of warning message and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To save the measurement results: Select “SAVE” and press ENTER. To discard the measurement result: Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 3 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 35 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 36 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM PLAYBACK RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN Input selection keys 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD Basic playback procedure TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME MUTE VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) (p.44) MEMORY MODE TUNING • Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) (p.48) PRESET MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 • Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) (p.52) • Playing back iPod music (p.56) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.60) 8 ENT TV • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.63) INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET • Listening to Internet radio (p.66) • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.68) 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu (p.75). PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 36 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 37 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM RECEIVER SOURCE SOURCE Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN 1 Input selection keys 1 PARTY ZONE 2 The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off with just one touch. TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP SCENE RETURN Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. • Select an input source (p.36) • Select a sound program (p.38) • Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.43) By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. SCENE Input Sound program Compressed SCENE link Music playback Enhancer BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE (Sci-Fi) Off On TV AUDIO 1 STRAIGHT On On NET NET RADIO MUSIC (5ch Stereo) On Off RADIO TUNER Off OPTION ENTER 1 The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. SCENE BD DVD Press SCENE. Configuring scene assignments 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOL. SETComplete L SL SW C R SR DISPLAY MEMORY 3 MODE TUNING PRESET MUSIC (5ch Stereo) On SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT TV • The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. If you want to control the corresponding playback device after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see “Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.96) to register it. CODE SET • You can also configure scene assignments for Zone2 playback (p.72). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 37 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 38 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Selecting the sound mode RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies PARTY ZONE 2 • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.39). PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.41) is automatically selected. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.9). ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback POP-UP/MENU OPTION • Press MUSIC repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.40). ENTER RETURN DISPLAY ❑ Selecting a surround decoder MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 4 INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT TV TV VOL VOL MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.42). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. INPUT MUTE • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. VOLUME SETUP MOVIE • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM on the front panel. TV TV CH CODE SET This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.41). ❑ Switching to the direct playback mode • Press DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.42). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.43). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 38 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 39 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up VOL. Sci-Fi L SL SW C R SR Sound program • When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected. • You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.75) in the “Option” menu. ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 39 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 40 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 5ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 40 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 41 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 ■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enjoying unprocessed playback CINEMA DSP 3D creates a natural stereoscopic sound field in your room. ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) 4 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN 1 CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions are met. PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME • One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) is selected (p.39). When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. • “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. 1 POP-UP/MENU SETUP Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up OPTION Press STRAIGHT. VOL. 3 ENTER Hall in Vienna RETURN L SL SW C VOL. R SR DISPLAY STRAIGHT L SL SW C R SR MEMORY MODE TUNING MOVIE PRESET MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT TV ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers. INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 41 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 42 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.108). 1 PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. RADIO Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 1 Press DIRECT. Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or disabled. VOL. VOLUME VOL. TOP MENU ProLogic POP-UP/MENU SETUP SW C R SR DIRECT L SL SW C R SR OPTION bPro Logic Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. bPLII Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for movies. bPLII Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for music. bPLII Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder suitable for games. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING MOVIE L SL PRESET MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SUR.DECODE ENHANCER DIRECT 4 Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies. 8 Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music. DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 • When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Selecting sound programs – Adjusting the tone control – Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) – Zone2 function ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET • You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 42 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 43 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN 1 Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 VOLUME Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. POP-UP/MENU SETUP Press ENHANCER. “ENHANCER” lights up OPTION ENTER ENHANCER RETURN VOL. Enhancer On DISPLAY L SL SW C R SR MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources. ENHANCER DIRECT ENHANCER 10 – Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz – High-definition streaming audio ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.75) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 43 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 44 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN 1 PARTY ZONE 2 FM AM SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU Selecting a frequency for reception 1 Setting the frequency steps POP-UP/MENU OPTION ENTER Press FM or AM to select a band. VOL. FM87.50MHz • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. RADIO VOLUME SETUP • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. 2 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Use the following keys to set a frequency. (Asia and General models only) TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). VOL. RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING MOVIE INFO MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 1 2 SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 STEREO TUNED Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). FM98.50MHz L SL SW C R SR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. z (power) Numeric keys ENT TV • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. INPUT TV VOL VOL TV TV CH MUTE CODE SET STRAIGHT (RX-S600) 3 PROGRAM Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”. • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.77) in the “Option” menu. TUFM50/AM9 4 5 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) En 44 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 45 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Registering favorite radio stations (presets) RECEIVER SOURCE • To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just wait for 5 seconds). HDMI 1 2 3 You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 4 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM USB MAIN AM PARTY ZONE 2 • To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. FM AM SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE ■ Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) POP-UP/MENU OPTION OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY ENTER RETURN • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 3 Press OPTION. MEMORY MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET MUSIC AutoPreset VOLUME SETUP MOVIE VOL. Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). RADIO • To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”. TOP MENU When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 4 INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”. VOL. 8 AutoPreset ENT TV ■ Registering a radio station manually Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.44) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. VOL. INPUT TV VOL VOL STEREO TUNED TV TV CH MUTE CODE SET 4 (RX-S600) To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the registration immediately. “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset VOL. 01:FM98.50MHz SW C R SR Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. 01:FM87.50MHz Preset number from which to start the registration L SL VOL. STEREO TUNED 02:Empty L SL SW C R SR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) En 45 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 46 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 AV AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 FM AM SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE ■ Clearing preset stations Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. 2 3 Press OPTION. 4 5 1 ■ Selecting a preset station You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. RADIO PRESET VOLUME VOL. VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz TOP MENU Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. L SL SW C ClearPreset R SR POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. DISPLAY • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. VOL. STEREO TUNED MEMORY MODE TUNING 01:FM98.50MHz PRESET PRESET MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP L SL R SR SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Preset station to be cleared If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. Numeric keys ENT VOL. TV INPUT TV VOL VOL SW C 01:Cleared TV TV CH MUTE CODE SET L SL SW C R SR 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. 6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. (RX-S600) PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) En 46 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 47 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Radio Data System tuning RECEIVER SOURCE • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. HDMI 1 2 3 (U.K. and Europe models only) 4 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.45). Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY ENTER RETURN MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 ENHANCER DIRECT INFO 4 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. 2 Press INFO. ■ Receiving traffic information automatically When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. INFO • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. VOL. STEREO TUNED ProgramType L SL SW C R SR • To cancel the search, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. TV INPUT TV VOL VOL TV TV CH MUTE Item name 8 ENT CODE SET About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. 9850 VOL. CLASSICS L SL FINISH VOL. STEREO TUNED TPFM101.30MHz STEREO TUNED SW C The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. L SL SW C R SR R SR Traffic information station (frequency) (RX-S600) Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) En 47 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 48 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM DAB DAB • If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1 appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again. • You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.51). • To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan” (p.49) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will be cleared. PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient transmission method. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. RADIO • Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/. VOLUME You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan. POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the DAB/FM antenna” (p.28). Preparing the DAB tuning MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING MOVIE MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 4 INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 1 Press DAB to select the DAB band. Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station. Press DAB to select the DAB band. TV TV CH CODE SET VOL. DailyService The following message appears on the front panel if you have not performed an initial scan yet. ENT TV TV VOL VOL 1 2 Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to perform an initial scan. INPUT MUTE Selecting a DAB radio station for reception VOL. L SL SW C R SR • “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available. • When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”. Press[ENTER] Secondary station (RX-S600D) 2 VOL. Press ENTER to start an initial scan. VOL. >>>-------30% L SL SW C BBCNational L SL SW C R SR R SR When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first DAB radio station as stored in station order. • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.77) in the “Option” menu. VOL. BBCRadio4 L SL SW C R SR PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) En 48 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 49 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM USB DAB DAB PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN • You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO ■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 1 Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception” (p.48) to tune into the desired DAB radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 2 Press DAB to select the DAB band. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. VOL. Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number. VOLUME SETUP ■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. PRESET:01 L SL SW C R SR • “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. VOL. 8 ENT TV 01:BBCRadio4 L SL SW C R SR INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET (RX-S600D) Preset number • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. VOL. 02:Empty L SL SW C R SR “Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use) PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) En 49 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 50 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Clearing preset DAB radio stations RECEIVER SOURCE Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers. HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM DAB DAB PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN 1 2 3 SCENE BD DVD TV NET Press DAB to select the DAB band. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. Displaying the DAB information The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB radio station. 1 2 Tune into the desired DAB radio station. Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. RADIO VOL. VOL. PROGRAM MUTE ProgramType ClearPreset VOLUME L SL SW C R SR Item name TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION 4 Cursor keys ENTER Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. ENTER RETURN VOL. VOL. DISPLAY 01:Clear? MEMORY MODE TUNING About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. L SL SW C R SR ClassicMusic SW C R SR PRESET Preset station to be cleared MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 Information SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 3 4 If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. INFO 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 VOL. ENT 01:Cleared TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE L SL TV TV CH L SL SW C R SR Service Label Station name DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) Information on the current station Ensemble Label Ensemble name Program Type Station genre Date And Time Current date and time Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best]) DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name CODE SET 5 (RX-S600D) 6 Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) En 50 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 51 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to 100 [best]). 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM DAB DAB PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 1 2 3 VOLUME 4 POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION Press DAB to select the DAB band. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Tune Aid” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB channel label. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN 5ALevel:80 L SL SW C DAB channel label PRESET MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 Reception strength SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT Frequency Channel label Frequency Channel label 174.928 MHz 5A 208.064 MHz 9D 176.640 MHz 5B 209.936 MHz 10A 178.352 MHz 5C 211.648 MHz 10B 180.064 MHz 5D 213.360 MHz 10C 181.936 MHz 6A 215.072 MHz 10D 183.648 MHz 6B 216.928 MHz 11A 185.360 MHz 6C 218.640 MHz 11B 187.072 MHz 6D 220.352 MHz 11C 188.928 MHz 7A 222.064 MHz 11D 190.640 MHz 7B 223.936 MHz 12A 192.352 MHz 7C 225.648 MHz 12B 194.064 MHz 7D 227.360 MHz 12C 195.936 MHz 8A 229.072 MHz 12D 197.648 MHz 8B 230.784 MHz 13A 199.360 MHz 8C 232.496 MHz 13B 201.072 MHz 8D 234.208 MHz 13C 202.928 MHz 9A 235.776 MHz 13D 204.640 MHz 9B 237.488 MHz 13E 206.352 MHz 9C 239.200 MHz 13F R SR MEMORY MODE MOVIE The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. VOL. DISPLAY TUNING ■ DAB frequency information 5 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET (RX-S600D) PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to DAB radio (RX-S600D) En 51 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 52 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM DAB FM 1 SCENE BD DVD Selecting a frequency for reception PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN TV NET RADIO • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. Press FM to select the FM band. • You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.77) in the “Option” menu. VOL. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. VOLUME FM87.50MHz SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR POP-UP/MENU SETUP 2 OPTION Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE MODE TUNING PRESET Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). TUNING MOVIE MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT VOL. STEREO TUNED ENHANCER DIRECT 4 INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET FM98.50MHz Numeric keys L SL SW C R SR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from an FM radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. (RX-S600D) PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) En 52 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 53 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM USB DAB • To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. FM PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN • To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just wait for 5 seconds). • You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. VOL. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO ■ Registering FM radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) VOLUME Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY ENTER RETURN AutoPreset ■ Registering an FM radio station manually Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset number. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.44) to tune into the desired FM radio station. 1 2 3 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. MEMORY MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT Press FM to select the FM band. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”. TV VOL. INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. TV TV CH AutoPreset CODE SET VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz (RX-S600D) 4 To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. L SL SW C R SR Preset number The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the registration immediately. • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset VOL. VOL. 01:FM87.50MHz STEREO TUNED 02:Empty L SL SW C R SR Preset number from which to start the registration “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) En 53 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 54 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 ■ Selecting a preset FM radio station ■ Clearing preset FM radio stations Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM DAB PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN FM TV NET PROGRAM MUTE Press FM to select the FM band. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired FM radio station. RADIO PRESET VOLUME TOP MENU SW C ENTER RETURN 4 OPTION Cursor keys • “No Presets” appears when no FM radio stations are registered. ENTER • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. DISPLAY VOL. 01:FM98.50MHz MEMORY L SL SW C R SR PRESET PRESET Preset station to be cleared SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. Numeric keys VOL. ENT 01:Cleared TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. STEREO TUNED • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. MODE TUNING Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and press ENTER. R SR POP-UP/MENU OPTION Press OPTION. ClearPreset STEREO TUNED L SL Press FM to select the FM band. VOL. VOL. 01:FM98.50MHz SETUP 1 2 3 You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. SCENE BD DVD 1 2 L SL SW C R SR TV TV CH CODE SET (RX-S600D) 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. 6 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) En 54 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 55 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Radio Data System tuning RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 (U.K. and Europe models only) 4 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM DAB PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU SETUP Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. OPTION • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.45). ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 2 MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 ENHANCER DIRECT INFO 4 Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. INFO VOL. STEREO TUNED ProgramType L SL SW C R SR Item name 8 INPUT TV VOL VOL Press INFO. ENT TV MUTE • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. TV TV CH CODE SET About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. 9850 VOL. STEREO TUNED CLASSICS L SL SW C R SR (RX-S600D) Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM radio (RX-S600D) En 55 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 56 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Playing back iPod music You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. Connecting an iPod Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. • To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable* (not supplied) is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite AV Cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, and connect your TV and the unit with a video pin cable (p.23). To select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.58). * You cannot use the Apple Composite AV Cable with the iPod which has the Lightning connector, or the iPod which does not support the video playback. Made for. 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) RADIO VIDEO AUX iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) AUDIO VIDEO 5V 2.1A iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone iPad (4th and 3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad, iPad mini (as of July 2013) USB VOL. Connected L SL SW C R SR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to change without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 56 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 57 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Playback of iPod content RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. 4 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM USB MAIN AM You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. USB PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE RADIO • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.58). • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.58). ■ Browse screen 1 • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. 1 VOLUME Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. TOP MENU iPod Top Cursor keys RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING Music Videos ENTER RETURN DISPLAY ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 1/2 3 Item number/total 4 Status indicators 8 • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL TV TV CH CODE SET 1/6 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing 2 Contents list SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC 5 1 List name PRESET MOVIE Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers 3 OPTION ENTER MUTE 2 POP-UP/MENU SETUP 4 iPod Music 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.59) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. Moves to the previous page of the list. iPod Now Playing Moves to the next page of the list. Artist Name Album Name Song Title 2:30 [DISPLAY] to List Browse Moves 10 pages forward. 5:10 Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 57 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 58 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 1 4 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 iPod Now Playing 5 ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) 1 4 5 NET FM V-AUX USB MAIN 2 Album Name 2:30 TV 5:10 [DISPLAY] to List Browse SCENE BD DVD 2 Song Title AM PARTY ZONE 2 NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.59) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY ENTER RETURN MEMORY MODE TUNING MOVIE External device operation keys PRESET MUSIC 2 Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. Operational remote control Function keys Cursor keys Select an item. Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. ENTER Confirms the selection. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. External device operation keys a Function a Resumes playback from pause. ENHANCER DIRECT s Stops playback. 4 d Stops playback temporarily. INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 f ENT g TV Skips forward/backward. TV CH CODE SET External device operation keys d Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. f g h j INPUT TV VOL To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MODE MUTE Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. Artist Name Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (while holding down). h j Searches forward/backward (by holding down). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 58 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 59 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Repeat/shuffle settings RECEIVER SOURCE You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings of your iPod. HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM USB MAIN • During simple play, configure the repeat/shuffle settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. AM PARTY ZONE 2 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. SETUP OPTION OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY ENTER RETURN MEMORY MODE MODE TUNING • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item PRESET MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER DIRECT 4 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 Repeat (Repeat) Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. 8 All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. ENT TV INPUT MUTE Function SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 1 TV VOL VOL Setting TV TV CH CODE SET Shuffle (Shuffle) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 59 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 60 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Playing back music stored on a USB storage device RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage device for more information. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN USB The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). PARTY ZONE 2 • Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use. • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION • The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. • The unit does not support a USB hub. DISPLAY Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. ENTER RETURN • You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit. Connecting a USB storage device MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. The unit (front) 1 8 RADIO Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. ENT VIDEO AUX TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET AUDIO VIDEO 5V 2.1A USB Top Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 1/12 USB storage device • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB Connected VOL. L SL SW C R SR PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 60 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 61 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 2 RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN 2 USB Now Playing PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET 4 USB Top Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 3 Artist Name SCENE BD DVD 1 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 5 1 ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 1/12 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing Album Name RADIO Song Title PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU [DISPLAY] to List Browse 2 Contents list Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING INFO 1 List name POP-UP/MENU SETUP MOVIE 2:30 VOLUME PRESET MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 3 Item number/total Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. DISPLAY • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.62) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Icon Moves 10 pages backward. ENT TV Moves to the previous page of the list. INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE Function TV TV CH CODE SET Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 61 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 62 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE ■ Repeat/shuffle settings You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB storage device contents. HDMI 1 2 3 4 USB Now Playing 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM 1 Artist Name USB MAIN Album Name Song Title AM TV 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. [DISPLAY] to List Browse SCENE BD DVD When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 2:30 PARTY ZONE 2 1 NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.62) and playback status (such as play/pause). VOLUME OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. External device operation keys • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Function Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. MEMORY MODE TUNING MOVIE INFO External device operation keys PRESET MUSIC s Stops playback. DIRECT d Stops playback temporarily. f 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT MUTE Resumes playback from pause. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT SLEEP TV VOL VOL a g Repeat (Repeat) Skips forward/backward. Shuffle (Shuffle) TV TV CH CODE SET 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 62 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 63 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM USB MAIN AM Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. NET PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.29). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. 1 POP-UP/MENU OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files. RADIO VOLUME SETUP Media sharing setup SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT TV SERVER Top DESKTOP NAS A NAS B NOTE ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed 1 Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is installed on your PC. 2 In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing and allow media to be shared with the device. INPUT TV VOL VOL Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. PRESET MOVIE MUTE Playback of PC music contents You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. 5 TV TV CH 1/4 CODE SET ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 63 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 64 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 3 RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN SERVER Now Playing TV NET 4 SERVER NAS A Blues Classical Electronica Jazz Pop Rock Soundtrack Speaking 3 Artist Name SCENE BD DVD 1 2 PARTY ZONE 2 ■ Browse screen If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 5 1 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 1/14 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing Album Name RADIO Song Title PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 2:30 1 List name [DISPLAY] to List Browse 2 Contents list VOLUME Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET 3 Item number/total Cursor keys • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. ENTER RETURN • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. DISPLAY • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. 4 Status indicators Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.65) and playback status (such as play/pause). 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 Icon Moves 10 pages backward. 8 ENT TV Moves to the previous page of the list. INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE Function TV TV CH CODE SET Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 64 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 65 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE ■ Repeat/shuffle settings You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC music content. HDMI 1 2 3 4 SERVER Now Playing 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM 1 Artist Name USB MAIN Album Name Song Title AM TV 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Repeat” (Repeat) or “Shuffle” (Shuffle) and press ENTER. [DISPLAY] to List Browse SCENE BD DVD When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 2:30 PARTY ZONE 2 1 NET RADIO 1 Status indicators PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MEMORY MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT TV Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. External device operation keys MUTE • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Repeat (Repeat) f g Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Function Skips forward/backward. Shuffle (Shuffle) INPUT TV VOL VOL • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.65) and playback status (such as play/pause). VOLUME TV TV CH CODE SET • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.91). 4 PLAYBACK ➤ To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 65 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 66 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Listening to Internet radio RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. 5 AV 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AUDIO The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE NET RADIO Top • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.29). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu. RADIO Bookmarks Locations Genres New Stations Popular Stations Podcasts Help • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. VOLUME • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. TOP MENU • This service may be discontinued without notice. POP-UP/MENU SETUP Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. NET PARTY ZONE 2 1 1/7 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. NET RADIO Now Playing Station Name 10 ENT Album Name TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE Song Title TV TV CH CODE SET 2:30 [DISPLAY] to List Browse • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press DISPLAY. • You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account. You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Information” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu. http://yradio.vtuner.com/ PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 66 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 67 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Browse screen RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 1 4 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM 2 3 SCENE BD DVD Bookmarks Locations Genres New Stations Popular Stations Podcasts Help 5 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RETURN 1 List name 1 Playback indicator 2 Contents list 2 Playback information MEMORY External device operation key MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. 4 Playback indicator • Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. 5 Operation menu DISPLAY 1 [DISPLAY] to List Browse 3 Item number/total Cursor keys ENTER ENTER SLEEP 1/7 [DISPLAY] to Now Playing Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION INFO Song Title VOLUME SETUP MUSIC 2 Album Name RADIO POP-UP/MENU MOVIE Station Name 2:30 PARTY ZONE 2 1 NET RADIO Now Playing AUDIO 1 MAIN 4 NET RADIO Top 5 AV ■ Playback screen Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Icon Function Moves 10 pages backward. 8 TV Moves to the next page of the list. INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE Moves to the previous page of the list. ENT TV TV CH CODE SET Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 67 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 68 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. iTunes PC 1 Router If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears. The unit Starts playback on iTunes or iPod Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. iTunes (example) Playback starts iPod (example) iPod • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.29). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu. • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of July 2013) On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. • The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 68 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 69 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Use the following remote control keys to control playback. RECEIVER SOURCE • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. HDMI 1 2 3 4 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.91) in the “Setup” menu. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.77) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. PARTY ZONE 2 External device operation keys TV NET Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. g RADIO Skips forward/backward. Caution PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. OPTION iTunes (example of English version) ■ Playback screen ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING MOVIE a f SCENE BD DVD Function External device operation keys PRESET MUSIC SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 1 AirPlay Now Playing Artist Name Album Name ENHANCER DIRECT 4 INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 2 Song Title 2:30 5:30 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET 1 Playback indicator Check this box 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 69 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 70 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). Preparing Zone2 Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.81) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Study room (Zone2) Living room (main zone) SPEAKERS FRONT • Analog audio sources (including FM/AM or DAB/FM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To listen to the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV 4–5 or AUDIO 2 jacks) of the unit. EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP CENTER The unit (rear) • The party mode (p.72) allows you to play back the same audio output in main zone as Zone2, whatever the input audio signal type. 1 9 2 FL FR 3 Zone2 Main zone PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 70 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 71 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z Controlling Zone2 4 HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 NET FM Input selection keys USB MAIN 1 2 AM PARTY ZONE 2 MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO VOLUME MUTE ENTER Press RECEIVER z. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (RX-S600) (p.44) When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back iPod music (p.56) • Listening to DAB/FM radio (RX-S600D) (p.48) • You can enable/disable Zone2 output using the ZONE key on the front panel (p.8). • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.63) Use the following keys to select an input source. • Listening to Internet radio (p.66) AV 4–5: AV 4–5 (AUDIO) jacks • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.68) AUDIO 2: AUDIO 2 jacks DISPLAY MEMORY V-AUX: VIDEO AUX jack MODE TUNING Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.60) 3 OPTION RETURN Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. PRESET MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 SLEEP 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL FM: FM radio SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE TV TV CH MUTE • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display to control Zone2. AM: AM radio (RX-S600) • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. DAB: DAB radio (RX-S600D) USB: USB jack (on the front panel) NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) • To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of time. CODE SET • To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE. (RX-S600) • Use an infrared repeater commercially available to operate the unit and external devices from Zone2. You can also control Zone2 by using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”. Visit the Yamaha website for details. • You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. Caution • It is useful to assign the frequently-used input to the SCENE key (p.72). • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 71 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 72 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 AV AUDIO 1 2 3 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. Input selection keys PARTY PARTY SCENE TV You can use the SCENE function to select the input source for Zone2 playback. 1 ZONE NE 2 BD DVD ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) 4 5 MAIN M ■ Selecting the input source with the SCENE function NET RADIO SCENE MAIN/ZONE2 • To use the SCENE function in Zone2, you must configure scene assignments separately from the main zone settings. • You can register only the input source to the SCENE key. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. 1 Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. – BD/DVD: AV 4 – TV: AUDIO 2 PROGRAM MUTE VOLUME – NET: NET RADIO When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. – RADIO: TUNER TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER RETURN 1 2 DISPLAY TUNING Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Press SCENE. The input source registered to the corresponding scene is selected and Zone2 output is enabled. MEMORY MODE PRESET MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE Press PARTY. TV TV CH CODE SET ❑ Configuring scene assignments 1 2 3 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Select a Zone2 input source. Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 72 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 73 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Viewing the current status RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Switching information on the front display Input source group Item 1 HDMI 1–5 AV 1–5 AUDIO 1–2 V-AUX Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. VOL. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO AudioDecoder SW C R SR Item name VOLUME About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. POP-UP/MENU SETUP L SL USB SERVER AirPlay Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER (DAB) See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.50) for details. VOL. ProLogic RETURN DISPLAY L SL SW C R SR Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Information MEMORY MODE TUNING TUNER (FM) PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 INFO • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. * During simple playback of iPod: Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name) NET RADIO OPTION ENTER Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.47). * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 73 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 74 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. OPTION VOL. ToneControl L SL SW C R SR • Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available. For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM. Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 75 Adjusts the sound field effect level. 75 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 75 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 75 Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 76 Front display DSP Level (DSP Level) Option Tone Control DSP/Surround Adaptive DRC (DSP/Surround) (A.DRC) DSP/Surround Volume Trim Lipsync Page Signal Info Audio In Volume Trim (Volume Trim) TV screen 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. (SW.Trim) 76 Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup” menu. 76 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 76 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. 77 Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 77 Auto Preset (Auto Preset) Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets. 45, 53 Clear Preset (Clear Preset) (RX-S600) Clears FM/AM radio stations (p.46) registered to preset numbers. (RX-S600D) Clears DAB radio stations (p.50) or FM radio stations (p.54) registered to preset numbers. — To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 74 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 75 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM (RX-S600 U.K. and Europe models only) Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. Page 47 Init Scan (Init Scan) (RX-S600D only) Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception. 48 Tune Aid (Tune Aid) (RX-S600D only) Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label. 51 Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.59), USB storage device (p.62), or media server (p.65). — Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.59), USB storage device (p.62), or media server (p.65). — Volume Interlock (Interlock) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 77 ❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Settings Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. Volume: low ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) On Off Volume: high On Off Input level Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) On (On) Output level Function Output level Item Input level ❑ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.43). Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments Default Bypass (Bypass) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.43). Settings • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. ■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, USB, (network sources) : On (On) Others: Off (Off) Configures the sound field program and surround settings. ❑ DSP Level (DSP Level) Adjusts the sound field effect level. Setting range -6 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments) Default 0 dB PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 75 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 76 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) ■ Signal Info (Signal Info) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. Displays information about the video/audio signal. Choices ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal Channel (CHAN) The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Input (V IN) Type and resolution of input signal Output (V OUT) Type and resolution of output signal ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. • To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB ■ Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.86) in the “Setup” menu. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment. On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment. Default AirPlay: Off (Off) Others: On (On) PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 76 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 77 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Audio In (Audio In) ■ Volume Interlock (Interlock) Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–5 or AV 1–3) with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output • Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks (such as game consoles) Input sources HDMI 1–5, AV 1–3 Settings Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited (Ltd) (default) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full (Full) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). ■ Setup procedure (To input audio through a digital optical jack) Select “AV 1” or “AUDIO 1” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital optical cable. (To input audio through a digital coaxial jack) Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a digital coaxial cable. (To input audio through analog audio jacks) Select “AV 4”, “AV 5”, or “AUDIO 2”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks with a stereo pin cable. ■ Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. Settings Off (Off) (default) Does not output video. HDMI 1–5, AV 1–5, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 77 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 78 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 4 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. • If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen (p.98). 1 2 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Network Language 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Network Language • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 78 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 79 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Setup menu items Menu Item Function Page Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 81 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 81 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 81 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 81 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 82 Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 82 Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 82 Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 82 Configuration Speaker HDMI Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 82 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 82 Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 83 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 83 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 84 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 84 Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 84 TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 84 Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 85 ARC Enables/disables ARC. 85 SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 85 Configuration CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 79 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 80 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Menu Item DSP Parameter Sound Function Page CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 85 Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 85 Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 86 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 86 Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 86 Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 86 Lipsync Volume Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 86 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 87 Main Zone Max Volume Sets the main zone maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 87 Main Zone Initial Volume Sets the main zone initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 87 Zone2 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 87 Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the Zone2 is turned on. 87 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 88 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 88 Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 88 Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 89 Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 89 Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 89 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 89 Information Displays the network information on the unit. 90 ECO Function Memory Guard DC OUT Network Language Power Mode IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 90 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 91 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 91 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 91 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 91 Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 92 Select an on-screen menu language. 92 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 80 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 81 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ❑ Subwoofer Speaker Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. Configures the speaker settings manually. Settings Setup Speaker Configuration HDMI Distance Sound Level ECO Equalizer Function Test Tone Use (default) Select this option when a subwoofer is connected. The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Network Language ❑ Front Selects the size of the front speakers. ■ Configuration Settings Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. ❑ Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. In addition to the 5.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the Zone2 speakers or bi-amp connection. Settings Basic (default) Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using Zone2 speakers or a bi-amp connection). BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp connections (p.17). Zone2 • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. ❑ Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers (p.70) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 81 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 82 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ❑ Surround ❑ Extra Bass Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. Settings Settings Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. • “Surround” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone2”. ❑ Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. ❑ Subwoofer Phase Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”. ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft) Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) ■ Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Settings Normal (default) Does not reverse the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB Others: -1.0 dB • By using test tones, you can make an adjustment while confirming its effect. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 82 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 83 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Equalizer ■ Test Tone Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. ❑ EQ Select Settings Selects the type of equalizer to be used. Off (default) Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. Settings PEQ Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO measurement (p.32). GEQ (default) Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Off Does not use the equalizer. • “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.32). • By using test tones, you can make an adjustment while confirming its effect. ■ Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”. 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Equalizer EQ Select GEQ Edit Channel 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1kHz 2.5kHz 6.3kHz 16kHz GEQ Front L Back: RETURN 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 83 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 84 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM HDMI HDMI OUT (TV) Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Configures the HDMI settings. Setup Speaker Settings Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. Configuration HDMI ❑ Standby Through Sound ECO Function Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–5) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Network Language Settings ■ Configuration ❑ HDMI Control Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.111). Settings Off (default) Disables HDMI Control. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”. ❑ TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.111) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Settings AV 1–5, AUDIO 1–2 ❑ Audio Output Default AUDIO 1 Selects a device to output audio. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers. On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 84 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 85 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ❑ Standby Sync Sound Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Configures the audio output settings. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. Setup Speaker DSP Parameter HDMI Lipsync Sound Volume ECO Function Network Language ❑ ARC Enables/disables ARC (p.19) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On (default) Enables ARC. ■ DSP Parameter Configures the surround decoder settings. ❑ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.41). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 5ch Stereo). Settings ❑ SCENE Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. On (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection. • TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device • Playback device: starting playback Choices (SCENE keys) BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO On Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is enabled, you can wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Settings Settings Off ❑ Panorama Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. Off (default) Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field. Default BD/DVD, TV: On NET, RADIO: Off • SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 85 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 86 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ❑ Center Width ■ Lipsync Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Setting range 0 to 7 Default 3 ❑ Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This setting is effective when “bPLII Music” is selected. Setting range -3 to +3 • You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.76) in the “Option” menu. ❑ Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Auto (default) Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Default 0 ❑ Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected. Setting range 0.0 to 1.0 Default 0.3 • “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit. ❑ Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”. Setting range 0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments) Default 0 ms CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 86 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 87 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Volume ❑ Zone2 Max Volume Configures the volume settings. Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB ❑ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Default +16.5 dB Settings Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.81) is set to “Zone2”. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. ❑ Zone2 Initial Volume Min/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the Zone2 is turned on. Settings ❑ Main Zone Max Volume Off (default) Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Sets the main zone maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Sets the level to the specified volume level. (0.5 dB increments) Default +16.5 dB ❑ Main Zone Initial Volume • This setting is available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.81) is set to “Zone2”. Sets the main zone initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Sets the level to the specified volume level. (0.5 dB increments) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 87 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 88 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ ECO Mode ECO Configures the power supply settings. Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Setup Speaker Auto Power Standby HDMI ECO Mode Sound Off (default) Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. ECO Function Network Language • Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. ■ Auto Power Standby • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Function Settings Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Setup Default U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. Speaker Input Rename HDMI Dimmer Sound Memory Guard ECO DC OUT Function Party Mode Set Network Language ■ Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. Input sources HDMI 1–5, AV 1–5, AUDIO 1–2, USB, V-AUX ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press ENTER. • To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 88 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 89 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a character. ■ Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Input Rename HDMI1 B l u - r a y Off (default) Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. OK:ENTER CANCEL:RETURN • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. 3 To confirm the new name, press ENTER. o Memory Guard Memory Guard Icon On • To cancel the entry, press RETURN. 4 5 To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3. Back:RETURN To exit from the menu, press SETUP. ■ Dimmer ■ DC OUT Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Configures the DC OUT jack setting. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Default 0 ❑ Power Mode Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Settings • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.88) is set to “On”. Continuous (default) Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of the power state (on/standby) of the unit. Power Sync. Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the unit is turned on. ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.72). Settings Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable (default) Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 89 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 90 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ IP Address Network Configures the network settings. Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). ❑ DHCP Select whether to use a DHCP server. Setup Speaker Information HDMI IP Address Sound MAC Address Filter ECO DMC Control Function Network Standby Network Network Name Language Network Update Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). ■ Manual network settings ■ Information Displays the network information on the unit. Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack MAC Address MAC address IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner) 1 2 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 90 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 91 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Network Standby Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). ❑ Filter Settings Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Off (default) Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Settings Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ❑ MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. 3 Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. ■ Procedure 1 2 ■ Procedure 1 2 ■ Network Name Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10). Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a character. Network Name To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Y a m a h a x x x x x x ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback. Back:RETURN 3 4 To confirm the new name, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 91 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 92 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM ■ Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. Language Select an on-screen menu language. ❑ Perform Update Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.98). Setup Speaker English HDMI 日本語 Français Deutsch Español Русский Italiano ❑ Firmware Version Sound Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit. Network ECO Function Language 中文 ❑ System ID Displays the system ID number. Settings English (default) English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • Japanese and Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 92 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 93 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) SPIMP.6MIN Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Set the unit to standby mode. Settings While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) 6 MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. 8 MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) STRAIGHT 3 4 5 PROGRAM Press PROGRAM to select an item. REMOTEIDID1 Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. The new settings take effect. Settings ID1 (default), ID2 ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control ADVANCED SETUP menu items Item Function Page SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 93 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 93 TU (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 94 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 94 INIT Restores the default settings. 94 UPDATE Updates the firmware. 94 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 94 1 To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds. To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds. • The registered remote control codes (p.95) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 93 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 94 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) Updating the firmware (UPDATE) (Asia and General models only) TUFM50/AM9 Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 (default) Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) TVFORMATNTSC UPDATEUSB New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV. Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images on the TV screen do not appear correctly. Settings NTSC, PAL • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the envelope icon (p) will appear in the screen. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.98). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL Restoring the default settings (INIT) INITCANCEL VERSIONxx.xx Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 94 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 95 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM RECEIVER SOURCE SOURCE Controlling external devices with the remote control HDMI 1 2 3 4 You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the external device. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE Press TV z. Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code. • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. PARTY ZONE 2 3 4 RADIO VOLUME • Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly. Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE blinks twice. • If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register the codes again. If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2. ■ TV operations TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU SETUP • Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.) OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Registering the remote control code for a TV MEMORY MODE TUNING MOVIE PRESET MUSIC DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 Switches the video inputs of the TV. MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV. TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV. TV CH Switch the channels of the TV TV z Turns on/off the TV. Numeric keys ENT INPUT TV VOL TV operation keys INPUT 4 TV MUTE You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have registered its remote control code. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER INFO Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source selected on the unit. TV CH CODE SET TV operation keys TV z CODE SET • You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys (p.96). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models). 1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. 2 Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 95 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 96 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 SOURCE z SOURCE RECEIVER 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN Input selection keys PARTY ZONE 2 TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the input selection keys. 1 SCENE BD DVD Registering the remote control codes for playback devices RADIO VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP External device operation keys Menu operation keys RETURN DISPLAY • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. 2 TUNING PRESET MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 ENHANCER External device operation keys 8 Numeric keys 3 ENT Press the input selection key. For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack. External device operation keys CODE SET CODE SET 4 Select an item. ENTER Confirms a selected item. TOP MENU Displays the top menu. POP-UP MENU Displays the pop-up menu. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. a Starts playback of the selected song/video. Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code. j Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. g If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2. • For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene assignments” (p.37). CONFIGURATIONS Returns to the previous screen. Switches information on the display. h TV operation keys TV CH Turns on/off the playback device. Cursor keys DISPLAY Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. 4 TV MUTE Menu operation keys DIRECT INPUT TV VOL Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE • By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For example, if you register the remote control code of your BD/DVD player on HDMI 1, you can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER, and the BD/DVD player after pressing SOURCE. RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the input source or scene. SOURCE z OPTION ENTER Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your playback device. ■ Playback device operations Searches forward/backward (by holding down). f Skips forward/backward. Numeric keys Enter numerical values. TV operation keys Control the TV (p.95). • These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control. ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 96 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 97 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Resetting remote control codes RECEIVER SOURCE SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN Input selection keys You can reset a remote control code registered to each input selection key. 1 SOURCE blinks twice. PARTY ZONE 2 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO 2 3 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP Press CODE SET. Press the input selection key. Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”. OPTION Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. ENTER RETURN If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1. DISPLAY MEMORY To reset the remote control to factory default settings MODE TUNING MOVIE PRESET MUSIC a Press CODE SET. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER DIRECT 4 INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 10 b Press RECEIVER. c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”. 8 Numeric keys ENT TV INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET CODE SET CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 97 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 98 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Updating the unit’s firmware via the network RECEIVER SOURCE HDMI 1 2 3 4 New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. 5 AV 1 AUDIO 2 3 1 V-AUX 4 5 2 USB NET FM AM MAIN TV NET PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU RADIO • If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.60). VOLUME POP-UP/MENU SETUP OPTION SETUP Cursor keys ENTER • To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.94). • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. Use the cursor keys to select “Perform Update” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update starts. • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). SCENE BD DVD 4 Note PARTY ZONE 2 • To cancel the operation without updating the firmware, press SETUP. 5 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press z (power) on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY MODE TUNING • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.94). PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 1 2 Press SETUP. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “Network Update” and press ENTER. ENT TV Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER. INPUT TV VOL VOL MUTE TV TV CH CODE SET If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen. Network Update p Icon Perform Update Firmware Version System ID x.xx xxxxxxxx Update:ENTER Back: RETURN CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 98 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 99 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize the speaker settings again (p.32). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.81). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.87). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.87). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the front display when selecting an input source... By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like, use “Input Rename” (p.88) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.89). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.93). You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.76). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.111). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 99 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 100 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.16). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.88). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.93). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.16). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 100 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 101 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.93). The remote control is set to operate the other zone. Set the remote control to operate the desired zone (p.71). The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in green). The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.95). Even if the remote control code is registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control. A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to HDMI 5. Reset the remote control code registered to HDMI 5 (p.97). The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself. External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be controlled using the remote control. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 101 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 102 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Audio Problem No sound. The volume cannot be increased. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.76). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.87). A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.76). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.83). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.32) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.81). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform YPAO (p.32) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.82). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone2”. When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “BI-AMP” or “Zone2”, you cannot use the surround speakers. To use the surround speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” to “Basic” (p.81). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.82). No sound is coming from a specific speaker. Unintended sound is coming from the surround speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.32) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.81). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.84). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 102 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 103 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Problem No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.21). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.84). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.85). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.76). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. Noise/hum is heard. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.88). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. The sound is distorted. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 103 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 104 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV. The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.76). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.113). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.19 to 22). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available only on RX-S600.) Problem Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.44). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.44). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.44). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.45). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 104 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 105 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM DAB radio (RX-S600D) Problem Cause Remedy No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.48). Reception strength of DAB radio is poor. Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.51), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. There is no DAB coverage in your area. Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of the DAB coverage in your area. There is multi-path interference. Check reception strength in “Tune Aid” in the “Option” menu (p.51), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. DAB information is not available or is inaccurate. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may not provide information. Contact the DAB broadcaster. No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station. No DAB radio reception even after performing an initial scan. DAB radio reception is weak or noisy. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 105 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 106 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The unit does not detect the USB device. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.90). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.90). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.63). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.91). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.63). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.91). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.60). The unit does not detect the PC. The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV Controller” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 106 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 107 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.63). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.56). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.29). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. MHL Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile device. Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. No device The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.93). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.63). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. Unable to play Version error APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 107 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 108 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Glossary Audio information DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ■ Audio decoding format DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital DTS-HD Master Audio Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 Dolby Pro Logic II DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. FLAC DTS 96/24 FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. MP3 DTS Digital Surround One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. MPEG-4 AAC DTS-ES An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. DTS Express PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 108 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 109 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. MHL MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 109 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 110 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 110 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 111 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Video signal flow Information on HDMI Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. Video device The unit TV HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.19) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.24). Operations available from the TV’s remote control HDMI in HDMI • Standby synchronization HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) HDMI Control COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI Control COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.37) VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO • Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed) VIDEO • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote control codes (p.96) APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 111 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 112 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM (Example) 7 HDMI Control HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.84) in the “Setup” menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”). 3 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 4 5 6 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 112 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 113 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 113 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 114 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Reference diagram (rear panel) NETWORK HDMI OUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 AV 4 OPTICAL CONPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI 3 SPEAKERS ANTENNA AV 5 FRONT DC OUT (RADIO) AM VIDEO (NET) HDMI 5 1A MHL 5V HDMI 4 AV 1 5V FM 0.5A CENTER EXTRA SP SURROUND / ZONE 2 /BI-AMP 75 AUDIO 2 AUDIO OUT VIDEO AV 2 AV 3 COAXIAL SUBWOOFER PRE OUT COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT AUDIO 1 (TV) VIDEO Y PB PR (RX-S600 U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 114 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 115 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. This receiver supports network connections. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. (For RX-S600D) The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries. “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Android™ Android is a trademark of Google Inc. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 115 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 116 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Specifications Input jacks HDMI MHL • Analog Audio • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC • Video Format (Repeater Mode) Audio x 4 (AV 4–5, AUDIO 2, V-AUX [Mini Jack]) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz Optical x 2 (AV 1, AUDIO 1) - VGA - 576i/50 Hz Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3) - 480i/60 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz - 576p/50 Hz Composite x 4 (AV 3–5, V-AUX) - 480p/60 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz Component x 2 (AV 1–2) - 576p/50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • Video • HDMI Input HDMI x 5 (HDMI 1–5*) * HDMI 5: MHL input compatible • Other jacks USB x 1 (USB2.0) NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - Dolby TrueHD - Dolby Digital Plus - 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A TUNER • Analog Tuner Output jacks - Dolby Digital [RX-S600 U.K. model] • Analog Audio - DTS-HD Master Audio FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio [RX-S600 Other models] - DTS Express FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) - DTS [RX-S600D U.K. and Europe models] - Subwoofer Out x 1 - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) - AUDIO OUT x 1 - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) [RX-S600D Australia model] - Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R*) * Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE2] - Headphone x 1 • Video • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Link Function: CEC supported DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER) USB MONITOR OUT • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory - Component x 1 • Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A - Composite x 1 • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 1 Other jacks • YPAO MIC x 1 • DC OUT x 1 Network • PC Client Function • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 • AirPlay supported • Internet Radio APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 116 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 117 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 ) Front L/R .................................................................55 W+55 W (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 ) Front L/R .................................................................60 W+60 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8) Front L/R .................................................................65 W+65 W Center ............................................................................... 65 W Surround L/R...........................................................65 W+65 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6) Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W • Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 ) (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) Front L/R.....................................................................125 W/ch H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround).................................12 dB/oct. Center.........................................................................125 W/ch L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct. Surround L/R ..............................................................125 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ).....................................90/110/140/160 W • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 ).............................. 200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................2.3 V • Output Level / Output Impedance • Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 ) ............................. 100 mV/470 • Frequency Response AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 2 V, Speaker Out) ......................................................................... 108 dB or more Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Component Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 • Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz ...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) • Volume Control Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Front L/R ...................................................................... 80 W/ch Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB Center ......................................................................... 95 W/ch • Video Signal Level [Asia and General models] • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ...................................................................... 95 W/ch [Other models] ....................................................................PAL Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 ................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 ) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC • Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more Surround L/R...........................................................80 W+80 W Surround ...................................................................... 80 W/ch • Video Signal Type SUBWOOFER........................................................... 1 V/1.2 k AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) Center ......................................................................... 80 W/ch Video Section AUDIO OUT....................................................... 200 mV/1.2 k Center ............................................................................... 80 W • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) • Filter Characteristics [China, Korea, Asia and General models] Mono ................................................................................70 dB Stereo...............................................................................69 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) • Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz Mono ................................................................................. 0.3% Stereo................................................................................ 0.5% • Antenna Input................................................ 75 unbalanced Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz Surround L/R................................................................ 95 W/ch APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 117 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 118 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM AM Section (RX-S600) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz DAB Section (RX-S600D) • Tuning Range ..........................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III) • Support Audio Format .......................... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG 4 HE AAC v2 (AAC+) • Antenna .........................................................75 unbalanced General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model]............. AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 220 W/300 VA [Other models]................................................................ 220 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off...............0.1 W or less HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals) ...........................................................................1.0 W (Typical) Network Standby On .........................................2.0 W (Typical) • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models]............................................. 480 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ...................... 435 x 111 x 320 mm (17-1/8” x 4-3/8” x 12-5/8”) * Including legs and protrusions • Weight............................................................. 7.8 kg (17.2 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 118 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 119 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Index Symbols Audio Return Channel (ARC) 19 Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 88 Auto Preset (FM radio, Option menu) 45 Automatic speaker setting optimization 32 Automatic station preset (FM radio) 45 AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 88 Envelope icon (p) 98 Lock icon (o) 89 Numerics 2.1-channel system 14 2ch Stereo (sound program) 3.1-channel system 14 4.1-channel system 14 4K Ultra HD 113 5.1-channel system 14 5ch Stereo (sound program) 40 40 A A.DRC (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 75 Access denied (error indication) 107 Access error (error indication) 107 Action Game (sound program) 39 Adaptive DRC (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 75 Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 86 ADVANCED SETUP menu 93 Adventure (sound program) 39 AirPlay 68 AM antenna connection 28 AM radio listening 44 Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 84 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 19 ARC (HDMI, Setup menu) 85 Audio Decoder (front display information) 73 Audio device connection 27 Audio file format (PC/NAS) 63 Audio file format (USB storage device) 60 Audio In (Option menu) 77 AUDIO jack 18 Audio Mode (DAB) 50 AUDIO OUT jack 10 Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 84 Audio recording device connection 30 B B RATE (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 Banana plug 16 Basic playback operation 36 Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 75 BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) Bi-amp speaker connection 17 Bitrate (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 Bitstream 113 Component video connection (video device) 25 COMPONENT VIDEO jack 18 Composite video connection (video device) 25 Compressed Music Enhancer 43 Configuration (HDMI, Setup menu) 84 Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 Crossover (Speaker, Setup menu) 82 Crossover frequency setting 82 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 32 D 81 C CAT-5 cable 29 Cellar Club (sound program) 40 Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 Center Image (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 86 Center Width (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 86 CH Label/Freq. (DAB) 50 Chamber (sound program) 40 CHAN (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 Channel (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 Check SP Wires (error indication) 107 CINEMA DSP 39 CINEMA DSP 3D 41 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85 Clear Preset (DAB radio, Option menu) 50 Clear Preset (FM radio, Option menu) 54 Clear Preset (FM/AM radio, Option menu) 46 Clock Time (Radio Data System) 47 COAXIAL jack 18 Component video cable 18 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 48 DAB information 50 DAB radio listening 48 DAB radio tuning 48 DAB/FM antenna connection 28 DAB+ 48 Date And Time (DAB) 50 DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 89 DC OUT jack 10 Decoder Off (front display information) 73 Default Gateway (Information, Setup menu) 90 Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 90 Default setting restoration 94 DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 90 Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) 48 Digital coaxial cable 18 Digital Media Controller (DMC) 91 Digital optical cable 18 Dimension (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 86 Dimmer (Function, Setup menu) 89 DIRECT (sound mode) 42 Direct playback 42 Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 108 Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 82 DLNA 63 DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) (DAB) 50 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 91 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 119 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 120 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM G GEQ (Equalizer, Setup menu) Hall in Munich (sound program) 40 Hall in Vienna (sound program) 40 HDMI (Setup menu) 84 HDMI cable 18 HDMI connection (video device) 24 HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 84 HDMI jack 18 HDMI OUT (TV) (Audio Output, Setup menu) HDMI signal compatibility 113 Headphones 43 High definition audio 113 High speed HDMI cable 18 11 I F Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 91 Firmware update 94 Firmware update (network) 94, 98 Firmware update (USB) 94 Firmware Version (Network Update, Setup menu) Firmware version check 94 FM antenna connection 28 FM radio listening 44 FM radio tuning 52 FM/AM radio tuning 44 83 H E ECO (Setup menu) 88 ECO Mode (Setup menu) 88 Enhancer (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 75 ENHANCER (sound mode) 43 Ensemble Label (DAB) 50 EQ Select (Equalizer, Setup menu) 83 Equalizer (Speaker, Setup menu) 83 Error indication (front display) 107 External device control (remote control) 95 External device operation key (remote control) Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 82 Input (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 Input Rename (Function, Setup menu) 88 Input selection key (remote control) 11 Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 76 Interlock (Option menu) 77 Internal Err. (YPAO error message) 34 Internal Error (error indication) 107 Internet radio listening 66 IP Address (Information, Setup menu) 90 IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 90 iPod charge 56 iPod connection 56 iPod content playback 57 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 68 iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 68 FORMAT (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 Format (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 Frequency (FM radio) 52 Frequency (FM/AM radio) 44 Frequency step setting 44, 94 Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 Front display (part names and functions) 9 Front display brightness 89 Front display information 73 Front panel (part names and functions) 8 Front panel jack connection 27 Function (Setup menu) 88 DMC Control (Network, Setup menu) 91 DNS Server (Information, Setup menu) 90 DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 90 Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 42 Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 42 Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 42 Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 42 Drama (sound program) 39 DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 108 DSP Level (DSP/Surround, Option menu) 75 DSP Parameter (Sound, Setup menu) 85 DSP Program (front display information) 73 DSP/Surround (Option menu) 75 DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 42 DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 42 Dynamic Range (Volume, Setup menu) 87 92 In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 76 Indicator (part names and functions) 9 INFO key 8, 11 Information (Network, Setup menu) 90 Information display (front display) 9 Information switching (front display) 73 INIT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94 Init Scan (DAB radio, Option menu) 48 Initial scan (DAB radio) 48 Input (front display information) 73 L 84 Language (Setup menu) 92 Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 82 Level Error (YPAO warning message) LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 109 Lipsync 109 Lipsync (Option menu) 76 Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 86 Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 109 35 M MAC Address (Information, Setup menu) 90 MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 91 MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 91 Main Zone Initial Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87 Main Zone Max Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87 Manual station preset (FM radio) 53 Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 45 Media sharing setup 63 Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 89 Menu language selection 31 Menu operation key (remote control) 11 MHL cable 18 MHL connection 24 MHL jack 18 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 120 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 121 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Over Distance (YPAO warning message) MHL Overloaded (error indication) 107 MHL-compatible device 24 MODE key 11 Monaural reception (FM radio) 44 Mono Movie (sound program) 39 MOVIE (sound program category) 39 Multiple room playback 70 Multi-zone 70 MUSIC (sound program category) 40 Music Video (sound program) 40 MUTE key 11 Muting 36 P PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94 Panorama (DSP Parameter, Setup menu) 85 PARTY key 11 Party mode 72 Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 89 PC connection 29 PC content playback 63 PEQ (Equalizer, Setup menu) 83 Perform Update (Network Update, Setup menu) 92 PHONES jack 8 Playback device connection 24 Playback device operation (remote control) 96 Please wait (error indication) 107 Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 Power cable connection 30 Power management 88 Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 89 Preset station selection (DAB radio) 49 Preset station selection (FM radio) 54 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 46 Program Service (Radio Data System) 47 Program Type (DAB) 50 Program Type (Radio Data System) 47 N NAS (Network Attached Storage) 29 NAS connection 29 NAS content playback 63 Network (Setup menu) 90 Network Attached Storage (NAS) 29 Network cable 29 Network connection 29 Network information 90 Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 91 Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 91 Network Update (Network, Setup menu) 92 No content (error indication) 107 No device (error indication) 107 No Front SP (YPAO error message) 34 No MIC (YPAO error message) 34 No Signal (YPAO error message) 34 No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 34 Noisy (YPAO error message) 34 NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) Numeric key (remote control) 11 O OPTICAL jack 18 OPTION key 11 Option menu 74 Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) Output (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 35 35 R 94 Radio Data System (FM radio) 47 Radio Data System information 47 Radio Data System tuning 47 Radio Text (Radio Data System) 47 Rear panel (part names and functions) 10 RemID Mismatch (error indication) 107 Remote control (part names and functions) 11 Remote control code registration (playback device) 96 Remote control code registration (TV) 95 Remote Control Code Search 95, 96 Remote control ID setting 93 Remote control ID setting (remote control) 93 Remote control sensor 8 Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 93 Rename (input name) 88 Rename (network name) 91 Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 59 Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 65 Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 62 Reset (remote control) 97 Roleplaying Game (sound program) 39 Router connection 29 11 S SAMPL (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 Sampling (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 SCENE (HDMI, Setup menu) 85 Scene configuration 37 SCENE function 37 SCENE link playback 37 Sci-Fi (sound program) 39 Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 86 Service Label (DAB) 50 SETUP key 11 Setup menu 78 Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 59 Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 65 Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) Signal Info (Option menu) 76 Signal information 76 Signal Quality (DAB) 50 SILENT CINEMA 43 Simple play (iPod) 58 SLEEP key 11 Sleep timer 11 Sleep timer (Zone2) 71 Sound (Setup menu) 85 Sound field effect 39 Sound mode selection 38 Sound program 39, 40 SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 93 APPENDIX ➤ 62 Index En 121 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 122 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM Speaker (Setup menu) 81 Speaker cable connection 16 Speaker connection 16 Speaker impedance 13 Speaker impedance setting 15, 93 Speaker indicator (front display) 9 Speaker placement 13 Spectacle (sound program) 39 Sports (sound program) 39 Standard (sound program) 39 Standby indicator (front panel) 8 Standby Sync (HDMI, Setup menu) 85 Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 84 Station preset (DAB radio) 49 Station preset (FM radio) 53 Station preset (FM/AM radio) 45 Status (Information, Setup menu) 90 Stereo mini jack 18 Stereo mini-plug cable 18 Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 18 Stereo reception (FM radio) 44 STP network cable 29 STRAIGHT (sound mode) 41 Straight decode 41 Subnet Mask (Information, Setup menu) 90 Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 90 Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 81 Subwoofer connection 17 Subwoofer Phase (Speaker, Setup menu) 82 Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 76 SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 42 Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 82 Surround decoder 42 SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 76 System ID (Network Update, Setup menu) 92 T Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 83 The Bottom Line (sound program) 40 The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 40 Tone Control (Option menu) 75 TP (Traffic Program) 47 Traffic information (Radio Data System) 47 Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 47 Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 75 TU (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94 Tune Aid (DAB radio, Option menu) 51 TV Audio Input (HDMI, Setup menu) 84 TV connection 19 TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 19 TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 21 TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 22 TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 23 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94 TV operation (remote control) 95 TV operation key (remote control) 11 Voltage selection 30 VOLTAGE SELECTOR 10 Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 87 Volume Interlock (Option menu) 77 Volume Trim (Option menu) 76 VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7 vTuner ID (Information, Setup menu) 90 U Z Unable to play (error indication) 107 UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94 USB jack 8 USB mass storage class device 60 USB storage device connection 60 USB storage device content playback 60 User Cancel (YPAO error message) 34 Zone2 (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 81 Zone2 Initial Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87 Zone2 Max Volume (Volume, Setup menu) 87 Zone2 speaker connection 17, 70 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 32 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer YPAO error message 34 YPAO MIC jack 8 YPAO microphone 32 YPAO warning message 35 32 V V IN (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 V OUT (Signal Info, Option menu) 76 VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 94 Version error (error indication) 107 VIDEO AUX jack 8 Video device connection 24 VIDEO jack 18 Video Out (Option menu) 77 Video pin cable 18 Video signal flow 111 Video signal type setting 94 Video/audio input jack combination 26 Virtual CINEMA DSP 41 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 122 RX-S600_S600D_om.book Page 123 Tuesday, May 28, 2013 1:36 PM © 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF616A0/EN-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
Yamaha RX-S600 Handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- Handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-S600 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-S600 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha RX-S600 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha RX-S600 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha RX-S600 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-S600 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha RX-S600 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-S600 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha RX-S600 Ohjekirja
- svenska: Yamaha RX-S600 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-S600 Kullanım kılavuzu
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha RX-V500DOwner de handleiding
-
Yamaha CRX-330 Handleiding
-
Yamaha T-D500 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-S600D de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A2070BL Handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A1080 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-A1070 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-AS710 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-S601D Handleiding